Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/reftex.texi @ 30778:293a86f4d8aa
(recent-dialog-mode-map): Bind down-mouse-1 to
`widget-button-click'. so that one can use left mouse button to
click on dialog buttons.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 14 Aug 2000 12:43:13 +0000 |
parents | 95bdbefcdac6 |
children | 6679ef9b33fe |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25829 | 1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- |
2 @c %**start of header | |
29819
7a583e16423b
@setfilename to ../info/reftex.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29772
diff
changeset
|
3 @setfilename ../info/reftex |
25829 | 4 @settitle RefTeX User Manual |
30009 | 5 @dircategory Emacs |
25829 | 6 @direntry |
7 * RefTeX: (reftex). Emacs support for LaTeX cross-references and citations. | |
8 @end direntry | |
9 @synindex ky cp | |
10 @syncodeindex vr cp | |
11 @syncodeindex fn cp | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
12 @set VERSION 4.12 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
13 @set EDITION 4.12 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
14 @set DATE March 2000 |
25829 | 15 @set AUTHOR Carsten Dominik |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
16 @set AUTHOR-EMAIL dominik@@astro.uva.nl |
25829 | 17 @set MAINTAINER Carsten Dominik |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
18 @set MAINTAINER-EMAIL dominik@@astro.uva.nl |
25829 | 19 @c %**end of header |
20 @finalout | |
21 | |
22 @c Macro definitions | |
23 | |
24 @c Subheadings inside a table. Need a difference between info and the rest. | |
25 @macro tablesubheading{text} | |
26 @ifinfo | |
27 @subsubheading \text\ | |
28 @end ifinfo | |
29 @ifnotinfo | |
30 @item @b{\text\} | |
31 @end ifnotinfo | |
32 @end macro | |
33 | |
34 @ifinfo | |
35 This file documents @b{Ref@TeX{}}, a package to do labels, references, | |
36 citations and indices for LaTeX documents with Emacs.@refill | |
37 | |
38 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} User Manual for | |
39 @b{Ref@TeX{}} @value{VERSION}@refill | |
40 | |
27195 | 41 Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 42 |
43 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim | |
44 copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and | |
45 this permission notice are preserved on all copies. | |
46 | |
47 @ignore | |
48 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX | |
49 and print the results, provided the printed document | |
50 carries a copying permission notice identical to this | |
51 one except for the removal of this paragraph (this | |
52 paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). | |
53 | |
54 @end ignore | |
55 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified | |
56 versions of this manual under the conditions for | |
57 verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting | |
58 derive work is distributed under the terms of a permission | |
59 notice identical to this one. | |
60 | |
61 Permission is granted to copy and distribute | |
62 translations of this manual into another language, | |
63 under the above conditions for modified versions, | |
64 except that this permission notice may be stated in a | |
65 translation approved by the Free Software Foundation. | |
66 @end ifinfo | |
67 | |
68 @titlepage | |
69 @title Ref@TeX{} User Manual | |
70 @subtitle Support for LaTeX labels, references, citations and index entries with GNU Emacs | |
71 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE} | |
72 | |
73 @author by Carsten Dominik | |
74 @page | |
27195 | 75 Copyright @copyright{} 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 76 |
77 @sp 2 | |
78 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @cite{Ref@TeX{} User Manual} for | |
79 @b{Ref@TeX{}} version @value{VERSION}, @value{DATE}.@refill | |
80 | |
81 @sp 2 | |
82 | |
83 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim | |
84 copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and | |
85 this permission notice are preserved on all copies. | |
86 | |
87 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified | |
88 versions of this manual under the conditions for | |
89 verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting | |
90 derive work is distributed under the terms of a permission | |
91 notice identical to this one. | |
92 | |
93 Permission is granted to copy and distribute | |
94 translations of this manual into another language, | |
95 under the above conditions for modified versions, | |
96 except that this permission notice may be stated in a | |
97 translation approved by the Free Software Foundation. | |
98 | |
99 @end titlepage | |
100 @page | |
101 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
102 @ifnottex |
25829 | 103 @node Top,,,(dir) |
104 | |
105 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a package for managing Labels, References, | |
106 Citations and index entries with GNU Emacs.@refill | |
107 | |
108 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers | |
109 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in great depth. All you need to know to use | |
110 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a | |
111 Nutshell}). You can go back later to other parts of this document when | |
112 needed.@refill | |
113 | |
114 @menu | |
115 * Introduction:: Quick-Start information. | |
116 | |
117 * Table of Contents:: A Tool to move around quickly. | |
118 * Labels and References:: Creating and referencing labels. | |
119 * Citations:: Creating Citations. | |
120 * Index Support:: Creating and Checking Index Entries. | |
121 * Viewing Cross-References:: Who references or cites what? | |
122 | |
123 * RefTeXs Menu:: The Ref menu in the menubar. | |
124 * Keybindings:: The default keybindings. | |
125 * Faces:: Fontification of RefTeX's buffers. | |
126 * Multifile Documents:: Document spread over many files. | |
127 * Language Support:: How to support other languages. | |
128 * Finding Files:: Included TeX files and BibTeX .bib files. | |
129 * AUCTeX:: Cooperation with AUCTeX. | |
130 * Optimizations:: When RefTeX is too slow. | |
131 * Problems and Work-Arounds:: First Aid. | |
132 * Imprint:: Author, Web-site, Thanks | |
133 | |
134 * Commands:: Which are the available commands. | |
135 * Options:: How to extend and configure RefTeX. | |
136 * Keymaps and Hooks:: For customization. | |
137 * Changes:: A List of recent changes to RefTeX. | |
138 | |
139 The Index | |
140 | |
141 * Index:: The full index. | |
142 | |
143 @detailmenu | |
144 | |
145 Introduction | |
146 | |
147 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
148 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
149 | |
150 Labels and References | |
151 | |
152 * Creating Labels:: | |
153 * Referencing Labels:: | |
154 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
155 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
156 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
157 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
158 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
159 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
160 | |
161 Defining Label Environments | |
162 | |
163 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
164 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
165 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
166 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
167 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
168 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
169 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
170 | |
171 Citations | |
172 | |
173 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
174 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
175 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
176 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
177 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
178 | |
179 Index Support | |
180 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
181 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
182 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
183 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 184 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
185 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
186 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
187 The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
188 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
189 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
190 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
191 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
192 |
25829 | 193 AUCTeX |
194 | |
195 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
196 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
197 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
198 | |
199 Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
200 | |
201 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
202 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
203 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
204 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
205 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
206 * Options (Index Support):: | |
207 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
208 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
209 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
210 * Options (Fontification):: | |
211 * Options (Misc):: | |
212 | |
213 @end detailmenu | |
214 @end menu | |
215 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
216 @end ifnottex |
25829 | 217 |
218 @node Introduction, Table of Contents, , Top | |
219 @chapter Introduction | |
220 @cindex Introduction | |
221 | |
222 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a specialized package for support of labels, | |
223 references, citations, and the index in LaTeX. @b{Ref@TeX{}} wraps | |
224 itself round 4 LaTeX macros: @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, | |
225 and @code{\index}. Using these macros usually requires looking up | |
226 different parts of the document and searching through BibTeX database | |
227 files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} automates these time--consuming tasks almost | |
228 entirely. It also provides functions to display the structure of a | |
229 document and to move around in this structure quickly.@refill | |
230 | |
231 @iftex | |
232 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
233 in great depth. All you need to know to use @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be | |
234 summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a Nutshell}). You can go | |
235 back later to other parts of this document when needed. | |
236 @end iftex | |
237 | |
238 @xref{Imprint}, for information about who to contact for help, bug | |
239 reports or suggestions. | |
240 | |
241 @menu | |
242 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
243 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
244 @end menu | |
245 | |
246 @node Installation, RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Introduction | |
247 @section Installation | |
248 @cindex Installation | |
249 | |
250 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre--installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
251 It was also bundled and pre--installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
252 21.x users want to install the corresponding plug-in package which is | |
253 available from the | |
254 @uref{ftp://ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/packages/,XEmacs ftp site}. See | |
255 the XEmacs 21.x documentation on package installation for | |
256 details.@refill | |
257 | |
258 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a copy | |
259 of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the maintainers web-page. | |
260 @xref{Imprint}, for more information.@refill | |
261 | |
262 @section Environment | |
263 @cindex Finding files | |
264 @cindex BibTeX database files, not found | |
265 @cindex TeX files, not found | |
266 @cindex @code{TEXINPUTS}, environment variable | |
267 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
268 | |
269 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile | |
270 document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the | |
271 @code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
272 require a search path, i.e. a list of directories to check. Normally | |
273 this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and | |
274 @code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. However, on some | |
275 systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If | |
276 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not work for you because it cannot find some files, | |
277 read @ref{Finding Files}. | |
278 | |
279 @section Entering @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode | |
280 | |
281 @findex turn-on-reftex | |
282 @findex reftex-mode | |
283 @vindex LaTeX-mode-hook | |
284 @vindex latex-mode-hook | |
285 To turn @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode on and off in a particular buffer, use | |
286 @kbd{M-x reftex-mode}. To turn on @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode for all LaTeX | |
287 files, add the following lines to your @file{.emacs} file:@refill | |
288 | |
289 @example | |
290 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with AUCTeX LaTeX mode | |
291 (add-hook 'latex-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with Emacs latex mode | |
292 @end example | |
293 | |
294 @page | |
295 @node RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Installation, Introduction | |
296 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}} in a Nutshell | |
297 @cindex Quick-Start | |
298 @cindex Getting Started | |
299 @cindex RefTeX in a Nutshell | |
300 @cindex Nutshell, RefTeX in a | |
301 | |
302 @enumerate | |
303 @item | |
304 @b{Table of Contents}@* Typing @kbd{C-c =} (@code{reftex-toc}) will show | |
305 a table of contents of the document. This buffer can display sections, | |
306 labels and index entries defined in the document. From the buffer, you | |
307 can jump quickly to every part of your document. Press @kbd{?} to get | |
308 help.@refill | |
309 | |
310 @item | |
311 @b{Labels and References}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to create unique labels | |
312 and to find the correct key for references quickly. It distinguishes | |
313 labels for different environments, knows about all standard | |
314 environments (and many others), and can be configured to recognize any | |
315 additional labeled environments you have defined yourself (variable | |
316 @code{reftex-label-alist}).@refill | |
317 | |
318 @itemize @bullet | |
319 @item | |
320 @b{Creating Labels}@* | |
321 Type @kbd{C-c (} (@code{reftex-label}) to insert a label at point. | |
322 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will either | |
323 @itemize @minus | |
324 @item | |
325 derive a label from context (default for section labels) | |
326 @item | |
327 prompt for a label string (default for figures and tables) or | |
328 @item | |
329 insert a simple label made of a prefix and a number (all other | |
330 environments)@refill | |
331 @end itemize | |
332 @noindent | |
333 Which labels are created how is configurable with the variable | |
334 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags}.@refill | |
335 | |
336 @item | |
337 @b{Referencing Labels}@* To make a reference, type @kbd{C-c )} | |
338 (@code{reftex-reference}). This shows an outline of the document with | |
339 all labels of a certain type (figure, equation,...) and some label | |
340 context. Selecting a label inserts a @code{\ref@{@var{label}@}} macro | |
341 into the original buffer.@refill | |
342 @end itemize | |
343 | |
344 @item | |
345 @b{Citations}@* | |
346 Typing @kbd{C-c [} (@code{reftex-citation}) will let you specify a | |
347 regular expression to search in current BibTeX database files (as | |
348 specified in the @code{\bibliography} command) and pull out a list of | |
349 matches for you to choose from. The list is @emph{formatted} and | |
350 sorted. The selected article is referenced as @samp{\cite@{@var{key}@}} | |
351 (see the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} if you want to insert | |
352 different macros).@refill | |
353 | |
354 @item | |
355 @b{Index Support}@* | |
356 @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to enter index entries. It also compiles all | |
357 entries into an alphabetically sorted @file{*Index*} buffer which you | |
358 can use to check and edit the entries. @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about the | |
359 standard index macros and can be configured to recognize any additional | |
360 macros you have defined (@code{reftex-index-macros}). Multiple indices | |
361 are supported.@refill | |
362 | |
363 @itemize @bullet | |
364 @item | |
365 @b{Creating Index Entries}@* | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
366 To index the current selection or the word at point, type @kbd{C-c /} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
367 (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). The default macro |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
368 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} will be used. For a more complex entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
369 type @kbd{C-c <} (@code{reftex-index}), select any of the index macros |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
370 and enter the arguments with completion.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
371 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
372 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
373 @b{The Index Phrases File (Delayed Indexing)}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
374 Type @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) to add |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
375 the current word or selection to a special @emph{index phrase file}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
376 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can later search the document for occurrences of these |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
377 phrases and let you interactively index the matches.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
378 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
379 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
380 @b{Displaying and Editing the Index}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
381 To display the compiled index in a special buffer, type @kbd{C-c >} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
382 (@code{reftex-display-index}). From that buffer you can check and edit |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
383 all entries.@refill |
25829 | 384 @end itemize |
385 | |
386 @page | |
387 @item @b{Viewing Cross-References}@* | |
388 When point is on the @var{key} argument of a cross--referencing macro | |
389 (@code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, | |
390 @code{\index}, and variations) or inside a BibTeX database entry, you | |
391 can press @kbd{C-c &} (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) to display | |
392 corresponding locations in the document and associated BibTeX database | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
393 files.@refill @* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
394 When the enclosing macro is @code{\cite} or @code{\ref} and no other |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
395 message occupies the echo area, information about the citation or label |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
396 will automatically be displayed in the echo area.@refill |
25829 | 397 |
398 @item | |
399 @b{Multifile Documents}@* | |
400 Multifile Documents are fully supported. The included files must have a | |
401 file variable @code{TeX-master} or @code{tex-main-file} pointing to the | |
402 master file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides cross-referencing information from | |
403 all parts of the document, and across document borders | |
404 (@file{xr.sty}).@refill | |
405 | |
406 @item | |
407 @b{Document Parsing}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to parse the document in | |
408 order to find labels and other information. It does it automatically | |
409 once and updates its list internally when @code{reftex-label} and | |
410 @code{reftex-index} are used. To enforce reparsing, call any of the | |
411 commands described above with a raw @kbd{C-u} prefix, or press the | |
412 @kbd{r} key in the label selection buffer, the table of contents | |
413 buffer, or the index buffer.@refill | |
414 | |
415 @item | |
416 @b{AUCTeX} @* If your major LaTeX mode is AUCTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can | |
417 cooperate with it (see variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX}). AUCTeX | |
418 contains style files which trigger appropriate settings in | |
419 @b{Ref@TeX{}}, so that for many of the popular LaTeX packages no | |
420 additional customizations will be necessary.@refill | |
421 | |
422 @item | |
423 @b{Useful Settings}@* To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} faster for large documents, | |
424 try these:@refill | |
425 @lisp | |
426 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
427 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
428 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
429 @end lisp | |
430 | |
431 To integrate with AUCTeX, use | |
432 @lisp | |
433 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
434 @end lisp | |
435 | |
436 To make your own LaTeX macro definitions known to @b{Ref@TeX{}}, | |
437 customize the variables@refill | |
438 @example | |
439 @code{reftex-label-alist} @r{(for label macros/environments)} | |
440 @code{reftex-section-levels} @r{(for sectioning commands)} | |
441 @code{reftex-cite-format} @r{(for @code{\cite}-like macros)} | |
442 @code{reftex-index-macros} @r{(for @code{\index}-like macros)} | |
443 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} @r{(to set the default macro)} | |
444 @end example | |
445 If you have a large number of macros defined, you may want to write | |
446 an AUCTeX style file to support them with both AUCTeX and | |
447 @b{Ref@TeX{}}.@refill | |
448 | |
449 @item @b{Where Next?}@* Go ahead and use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Use its menus | |
450 until you have picked up the key bindings. For an overview of what you | |
451 can do in each of the different special buffers, press @kbd{?}. Read | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
452 the manual if you get stuck, of if you are curious what else might be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
453 available. The first part of the manual explains in |
25829 | 454 a tutorial way how to use and customize @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The second |
455 part is a command and variable reference.@refill | |
456 @end enumerate | |
457 | |
458 @node Table of Contents, Labels and References, Introduction, Top | |
459 @chapter Table of Contents | |
460 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer | |
461 @cindex Table of contents buffer | |
462 @findex reftex-toc | |
463 @kindex C-c = | |
464 | |
465 Pressing the keys @kbd{C-c =} pops up a buffer showing the table of | |
466 contents of the document. By default, this @file{*toc*} buffer shows | |
467 only the sections of a document. Using the @kbd{l} and @kbd{i} keys you | |
468 can display all labels and index entries defined in the document as | |
469 well.@refill | |
470 | |
471 With the cursor in any of the lines denoting a location in the | |
472 document, simple key strokes will display the corresponding part in | |
473 another window, jump to that location, or perform other actions.@refill | |
474 | |
475 @kindex ? | |
476 Here is a list of special commands in the @file{*toc*} buffer. A | |
477 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
478 @kbd{?}.@refill | |
479 | |
480 @table @kbd | |
481 | |
482 @tablesubheading{General} | |
483 @item ? | |
484 Display a summary of commands. | |
485 | |
486 @item 0-9, - | |
487 Prefix argument. | |
488 | |
489 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
490 @item n | |
491 Goto next entry in the table of context. | |
492 | |
493 @item p | |
494 Goto previous entry in the table of context. | |
495 | |
496 @item C-c C-n | |
497 Goto next section heading. Useful when many labels and index entries | |
498 separate section headings.@refill | |
499 | |
500 @item C-c C-p | |
501 Goto previous section heading. | |
502 | |
503 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} | |
504 @item @key{SPC} | |
505 Show the corresponding location in another window. This command does | |
506 @emph{not} select that other window.@refill | |
507 | |
508 @item @key{TAB} | |
509 Goto the location in another window. | |
510 | |
511 @item @key{RET} | |
512 Go to the location and hide the @file{*toc*} buffer. This will restore | |
513 the window configuration before @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-c =}) was | |
514 called.@refill | |
515 | |
516 @item mouse-2 | |
517 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection | |
518 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a line has the same effect as @key{RET}. | |
519 See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
520 (Fontification)}.@refill | |
521 | |
522 @item f | |
523 @vindex reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
524 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
525 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
526 always show the location corresponding to the line at point in the | |
527 @file{*toc*} buffer. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
528 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
529 @code{reftex-toc-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files already | |
530 visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for follow | |
531 mode. See, however, the variable | |
532 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
533 | |
534 @item . | |
535 Show calling point in another window. This is the point from where | |
536 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. | |
537 | |
538 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
539 @item q | |
540 Hide the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
541 @code{reftex-toc} was last called.@refill | |
542 | |
543 @item k | |
544 Kill the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
545 @code{reftex-toc} was last called.@refill | |
546 | |
547 @item C-c > | |
548 Switch to the @file{*Index*} buffer of this document. With prefix | |
549 @samp{2}, restrict the index to the section at point in the @file{*toc*} | |
550 buffer. | |
551 | |
552 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
553 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
554 @item t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
555 @vindex reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
556 Change the maximum level of toc entries displayed in the @file{*toc*} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
557 buffer. Without prefix arg, all levels will be included. With prefix |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
558 arg (e.g @kbd{3 t}), ignore all toc entries with level greater than |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
559 @var{arg} (3 in this case). Chapters are level 1, sections are level 2. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
560 The mode line @samp{T<>} indicator shows the current value. The default |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
561 depth can be configured with the variable |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
562 @code{reftex-toc-max-level}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
563 |
25829 | 564 @item F |
565 @vindex reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
566 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
567 @file{*toc*} buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the | |
568 variable @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}.@refill | |
569 | |
570 @item l | |
571 @vindex reftex-toc-include-labels | |
572 Toggle the display of labels in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The default | |
573 for this flag can be set with the variable | |
574 @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}. When called with a prefix argument, | |
575 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a label type and include only labels of | |
576 the selected type in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode line @samp{L<>} | |
577 indicator shows which labels are included.@refill | |
578 | |
579 @item i | |
580 @vindex reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
581 Toggle the display of index entries in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The | |
582 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
583 @code{reftex-toc-include-index-entries}. When called with a prefix | |
584 argument, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a specific index and include | |
585 only entries in the selected index in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode | |
586 line @samp{I<>} indicator shows which index is used.@refill | |
587 | |
588 @item c | |
589 @vindex reftex-toc-include-context | |
590 Toggle the display of label and index context in the @file{*toc*} | |
591 buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
592 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}.@refill | |
593 | |
594 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
595 | |
596 @item g | |
597 Rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
598 document.@refill | |
599 | |
600 @item r | |
601 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
602 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. When | |
603 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-nil, rescan only the file this | |
604 location is defined in, not the entire document.@refill | |
605 | |
606 @item C-u r | |
607 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} | |
608 buffer.@refill | |
609 | |
610 @item x | |
611 Switch to the @file{*toc*} buffer of an external document. When the | |
612 current document is using the @code{xr} package (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
613 package)}), @b{Ref@TeX{}} will switch to one of the external | |
614 documents.@refill | |
615 | |
616 @end table | |
617 | |
618 @vindex reftex-toc-map | |
619 In order to define additional commands for the @file{*toc*} buffer, the | |
620 keymap @code{reftex-toc-map} may be used.@refill | |
621 | |
622 @cindex Sectioning commands | |
623 @cindex KOMA-Script, LaTeX classes | |
624 @cindex LaTeX classes, KOMA-Script | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
625 @cindex TOC entries for environments |
25829 | 626 @vindex reftex-section-levels |
627 The section macros recognized by @b{Ref@TeX{}} are all LaTeX section | |
628 macros (from @code{\part} to @code{\subsubparagraph}) and the commands | |
629 @code{\addchap} and @code{\addsec} from the KOMA-Script classes. | |
630 Additional macros can be configured with the variable | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
631 @code{reftex-section-levels}. It is also possible to add certain LaTeX |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
632 environments to the table of contents. This is probably only useful for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
633 theorem-like environments. @xref{Defining Label Environments}, for an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
634 example. |
25829 | 635 |
636 @node Labels and References, Citations, Table of Contents, Top | |
637 @chapter Labels and References | |
638 @cindex Labels in LaTeX | |
639 @cindex References in LaTeX | |
640 @cindex Label category | |
641 @cindex Label environment | |
642 @cindex @code{\label} | |
643 | |
644 LaTeX provides a powerful mechanism to deal with cross--references in a | |
645 document. When writing a document, any part of it can be marked with a | |
646 label, like @samp{\label@{mark@}}. LaTeX records the current value of a | |
647 certain counter when a label is defined. Later references to this label | |
648 (like @samp{\ref@{mark@}}) will produce the recorded value of the | |
649 counter.@refill | |
650 | |
651 Labels can be used to mark sections, figures, tables, equations, | |
652 footnotes, items in enumerate lists etc. LaTeX is context sensitive in | |
653 doing this: A label defined in a figure environment automatically | |
654 records the figure counter, not the section counter.@refill | |
655 | |
656 Several different environments can share a common counter and therefore | |
657 a common label category. E.g. labels in both @code{equation} and | |
658 @code{eqnarray} environments record the value of the same counter - the | |
659 equation counter.@refill | |
660 | |
661 @menu | |
662 * Creating Labels:: | |
663 * Referencing Labels:: | |
664 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
665 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
666 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
667 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
668 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
669 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
670 @end menu | |
671 | |
672 @node Creating Labels, Referencing Labels, , Labels and References | |
673 @section Creating Labels | |
674 @cindex Creating labels | |
675 @cindex Labels, creating | |
676 @cindex Labels, deriving from context | |
677 @kindex C-c ( | |
678 @findex reftex-label | |
679 | |
680 In order to create a label in a LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c (} | |
681 (@code{reftex-label}). Just like LaTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} is context sensitive | |
682 and will figure out the environment it currently is in and adapt the | |
683 label to that environment. A label usually consists of a short prefix | |
684 indicating the type of the label and a unique mark. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
685 3 different modes to create this mark.@refill | |
686 | |
687 @enumerate | |
688 @item | |
689 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
690 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
691 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
692 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
693 A label can be derived from context. This means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} takes | |
694 the context of the label definition and constructs a label from | |
695 that@footnote{Note that the context may contain constructs which are | |
696 illegal in labels. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will therefore strip the accent from | |
697 accented Latin-1 characters and remove everything else which is not | |
698 legal in labels. This mechanism is safe, but may not be satisfactory | |
699 for non-western languages. Check the following variables if you need to | |
700 change things: @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
701 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}, @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}, | |
702 @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}.}. This works best for section labels, | |
703 where the section heading is used to construct a label. In fact, | |
704 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method only for section | |
705 labels. You will be asked to confirm the derived label, or edit | |
706 it.@refill | |
707 | |
708 @item | |
709 We may also use a simple unique number to identify a label. This is | |
710 mostly useful for labels where it is difficult to come up with a very | |
711 good descriptive name. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method | |
712 for equations, enumerate items and footnotes. The author of @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
713 tends to write documents with many equations and finds it impossible | |
714 to come up with good names for each of them. These simple labels are | |
715 inserted without query, and are therefore very fast. Good descriptive | |
716 names are not really necessary as @b{Ref@TeX{}} will provide context to | |
717 reference a label (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
718 | |
719 @item | |
720 The third method is to ask the user for a label. This is most | |
721 useful for things which are easy to describe briefly and do not turn up | |
722 too frequently in a document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses this for figures and | |
723 tables. Of course, one can enter the label directly by typing the full | |
724 @samp{\label@{mark@}}. The advantage of using @code{reftex-label} | |
725 anyway is that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that a new label has been defined. | |
726 It will then not be necessary to rescan the document in order to access | |
727 this label later.@refill | |
728 @end enumerate | |
729 | |
730 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
731 If you want to change the way certain labels are created, check out the | |
732 variable @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating | |
733 Labels)}).@refill | |
734 | |
735 If you are using AUCTeX to write your LaTeX documents, you can | |
736 set it up to delegate the creation of labels to | |
737 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @xref{AUCTeX}, for more information. | |
738 | |
739 @node Referencing Labels, Builtin Label Environments, Creating Labels, Labels and References | |
740 @section Referencing Labels | |
741 @cindex Referencing labels | |
742 @cindex Labels, referencing | |
743 @cindex Selection buffer, labels | |
744 @cindex Selection process | |
745 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
746 @kindex C-c ) | |
747 @findex reftex-reference | |
748 | |
749 Referencing Labels is really at the heart of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Press @kbd{C-c | |
750 )} in order to reference a label (reftex-reference). This will start a | |
751 selection process and finally insert the complete @samp{\ref@{label@}} | |
752 into the buffer.@refill | |
753 | |
754 First, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will determine the label category which is required. | |
755 Often that can be figured out from context. For example, if you | |
756 write @samp{As shown in eq.} and the press @kbd{C-c )}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows | |
757 that an equation label is going to be referenced. If it cannot figure | |
758 out what label category is needed, it will query for one.@refill | |
759 | |
760 You will then be presented with a label selection menu. This is a | |
761 special buffer which contains an outline of the document along with all | |
762 labels of the given label category. In addition, next to the label | |
763 there will be one line of context of the label definition, which is some | |
764 text in the buffer near the label definition. Usually this is | |
765 sufficient to identify the label. If you are unsure about a certain | |
766 label, pressing @key{SPC} will show the label definition point in | |
767 another window.@refill | |
768 | |
769 In order to reference a label, move to cursor to the correct label and | |
770 press @key{RET}. You can also reference several labels with a single | |
771 call to @code{reftex-reference} by marking entries with the @kbd{m} | |
772 key (see below). | |
773 | |
774 @kindex ? | |
775 Here is a list of special commands in the selection buffer. A summary | |
776 of this information is always available from the selection process by | |
777 pressing @kbd{?}.@refill | |
778 | |
779 | |
780 | |
781 @table @kbd | |
782 @tablesubheading{General} | |
783 @item ? | |
784 Show a summary of available commands. | |
785 | |
786 @item 0-9,- | |
787 Prefix argument. | |
788 | |
789 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
790 @item n | |
791 Go to next label. | |
792 | |
793 @item p | |
794 Go to previous label. | |
795 | |
796 @item b | |
797 Jump back to the position where you last left the selection buffer. | |
798 Normally this should get you back to the last referenced label.@refill | |
799 | |
800 @item C-c C-n | |
801 Goto next section heading. | |
802 | |
803 @item C-c C-p | |
804 Goto previous section heading. | |
805 | |
806 @tablesubheading{Displaying Context} | |
807 @item @key{SPC} | |
808 Show the surroundings of the definition of the current label in another | |
809 window. See also the @kbd{f} key.@refill | |
810 | |
811 @item f | |
812 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
813 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
814 always display the full context of the current label. This is similar | |
815 to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. Note that only context | |
816 in files already visited is shown. @b{RefTeX} will not visit a file | |
817 just for follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
818 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
819 | |
820 @item . | |
821 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
822 called @code{reftex-reference}.@refill | |
823 | |
824 @tablesubheading{Selecting a label and creating the reference} | |
825 @item @key{RET} | |
826 Insert a reference to the label at point into the buffer from which the | |
827 selection process was started. When entries have been marked, @key{RET} | |
828 references all marked labels.@refill | |
829 | |
830 @item mouse-2 | |
831 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection | |
832 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a label will accept it like @key{RET} | |
833 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
834 (Misc)}.@refill | |
835 | |
836 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
837 @item m - + , | |
838 Mark the current entry. When several entries have been marked, pressing | |
839 @kbd{RET} will accept all of them and place them into several | |
840 @code{\ref} macros. The special markers @samp{,-+} also store a | |
841 separator to be inserted before the corresponding reference. So marking | |
842 six entries with the keys @samp{m , , - , +} will give a reference list | |
843 like this (see the variable @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation}) | |
844 @example | |
845 In eqs. (1), (2), (3)--(4), (5) and (6) | |
846 @end example | |
847 | |
848 @item u | |
849 Unmark a marked entry. | |
850 | |
851 @c FIXME: Do we need `A' as well for consistency? | |
852 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{saferef} | |
853 @cindex @code{saferef}, LaTeX package | |
854 @item a | |
855 Accept the marked entries and put all labels as a comma-separated list | |
856 into one @emph{single} @code{\ref} macro. Some packages like | |
857 @file{saferef.sty} support multiple references in this way.@refill | |
858 | |
859 @item l | |
860 Use the last referenced label(s) again. This is equivalent to moving to | |
861 that label and pressing @key{RET}.@refill | |
862 | |
863 @item @key{TAB} | |
864 Enter a label with completion. This may also be a label which does not | |
865 yet exist in the document. | |
866 | |
867 @item v | |
868 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
869 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
870 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
871 Toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} macro for references. The | |
872 @code{\vref} macro is defined in the @code{varioref} LaTeX package. | |
873 With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a @code{\vref} | |
874 macro. The current state of this flag is displayed by the @samp{S<>} | |
875 indicator in the mode line of the selection buffer.@refill | |
876 | |
877 @item V | |
878 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
879 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
880 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
881 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
882 Cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The | |
883 @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} macros are defined in the @code{fancyref} | |
884 LaTeX package. With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a | |
885 @code{\fref} or @code{\Fref} macro. The current state of this flag is | |
886 displayed by the @samp{S<>} indicator in the mode line of the | |
887 selection buffer. | |
888 | |
889 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
890 | |
891 @item q | |
892 Exit the selection process without inserting any reference into the | |
893 buffer.@refill | |
894 | |
895 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
896 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
897 The defaults for the following flags can be configured with the variable | |
898 @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing Labels)}). | |
899 | |
900 @item c | |
901 Toggle the display of the one-line label definition context in the | |
902 selection buffer.@refill | |
903 | |
904 @item F | |
905 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
906 selection buffer.@refill | |
907 | |
908 @item t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
909 Toggle the display of the table of contents in the selection buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
910 With prefix @var{arg}, change the maximum level of toc entries displayed |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
911 to @var{arg}. Chapters are level 1, section are level 2.@refill |
25829 | 912 |
913 @item # | |
914 Toggle the display of a label counter in the selection buffer.@refill | |
915 | |
916 @item % | |
917 Toggle the display of labels hidden in comments in the selection | |
918 buffers. Sometimes, you may have commented out parts of your document. | |
919 If these parts contain label definitions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can still display | |
920 and reference these labels.@refill | |
921 | |
922 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
923 @item g | |
924 Update the menu. This will rebuilt the menu from the internal label | |
925 list, but not reparse the document (see @kbd{r}).@refill | |
926 | |
927 @item r | |
928 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
929 Reparse the document to update the information on all labels and rebuild | |
930 the menu. If the variable @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is | |
931 non-@code{nil} and your document is a multifile document, this will | |
932 reparse only a part of the document (the file in which the label at | |
933 point was defined).@refill | |
934 | |
935 @item C-u r | |
936 Reparse the @emph{entire} document. | |
937 | |
938 @item s | |
939 Switch the label category. After prompting for another label category, | |
940 a menu for that category will be shown.@refill | |
941 | |
942 @item x | |
943 Reference a label from an external document. With the LaTeX package | |
944 @code{xr} it is possible to reference labels defined in another | |
945 document. This key will switch to the label menu of an external | |
946 document and let you select a label from there (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
947 package),,xr}).@refill | |
948 | |
949 @end table | |
950 | |
951 @vindex reftex-select-label-map | |
952 In order to define additional commands for the selection process, the | |
953 keymap @code{reftex-select-label-map} may be used.@refill | |
954 | |
955 @node Builtin Label Environments, Defining Label Environments, Referencing Labels, Labels and References | |
956 @section Builtin Label Environments | |
957 @cindex Builtin label environments | |
958 @cindex Label environments, builtin | |
959 @cindex Environments, builtin | |
960 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
961 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
962 | |
963 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced | |
964 with a label (i.e. which carry their own counters). By default, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
965 recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The | |
966 LaTeX Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley | |
967 1994.}. These are:@refill | |
968 | |
969 @itemize @minus | |
970 @item | |
971 @cindex @code{figure}, LaTeX environment | |
972 @cindex @code{figure*}, LaTeX environment | |
973 @cindex @code{table}, LaTeX environment | |
974 @cindex @code{table*}, LaTeX environment | |
975 @cindex @code{equation}, LaTeX environment | |
976 @cindex @code{eqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
977 @cindex @code{enumerate}, LaTeX environment | |
978 @cindex @code{\footnote}, LaTeX macro | |
979 @cindex LaTeX macro @code{footnote} | |
980 @cindex LaTeX core | |
981 @code{figure}, @code{figure*}, @code{table}, @code{table*}, @code{equation}, | |
982 @code{eqnarray}, @code{enumerate}, the @code{\footnote} macro (this is | |
983 the LaTeX core stuff)@refill | |
984 @item | |
985 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
986 @cindex @code{amsmath}, LaTeX package | |
987 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{amsmath} | |
988 @cindex @code{align}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
989 @cindex @code{gather}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
990 @cindex @code{multline}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
991 @cindex @code{flalign}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
992 @cindex @code{alignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
993 @cindex @code{xalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
994 @cindex @code{xxalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
995 @cindex @code{subequations}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
996 @code{align}, @code{gather}, @code{multline}, @code{flalign}, | |
997 @code{alignat}, @code{xalignat}, @code{xxalignat}, @code{subequations} | |
998 (from AMS-LaTeX's @file{amsmath.sty} package)@refill | |
999 @item | |
1000 @cindex @code{endnote}, LaTeX package | |
1001 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{endnote} | |
1002 @cindex @code{\endnote}, LaTeX macro | |
1003 the @code{\endnote} macro (from @file{endnotes.sty}) | |
1004 @item | |
1005 @cindex @code{fancybox}, LaTeX package | |
1006 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancybox} | |
1007 @cindex @code{Beqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
1008 @code{Beqnarray} (@file{fancybox.sty}) | |
1009 @item | |
1010 @cindex @code{floatfig}, LaTeX package | |
1011 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{floatfig} | |
1012 @cindex @code{floatingfig}, LaTeX environment | |
1013 @code{floatingfig} (@file{floatfig.sty}) | |
1014 @item | |
1015 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX package | |
1016 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{longtable} | |
1017 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1018 @code{longtable} (@file{longtable.sty}) | |
1019 @item | |
1020 @cindex @code{picinpar}, LaTeX package | |
1021 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{picinpar} | |
1022 @cindex @code{figwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1023 @cindex @code{tabwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1024 @code{figwindow}, @code{tabwindow} (@file{picinpar.sty}) | |
1025 @item | |
1026 @cindex @code{sidecap}, LaTeX package | |
1027 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{sidecap} | |
1028 @cindex @code{SCfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1029 @cindex @code{SCtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1030 @code{SCfigure}, @code{SCtable} (@file{sidecap.sty}) | |
1031 @item | |
1032 @cindex @code{rotating}, LaTeX package | |
1033 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{rotating} | |
1034 @cindex @code{sidewaysfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1035 @cindex @code{sidewaystable}, LaTeX environment | |
1036 @code{sidewaysfigure}, @code{sidewaystable} (@file{rotating.sty}) | |
1037 @item | |
1038 @cindex @code{subfig}, LaTeX package | |
1039 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{subfigure} | |
1040 @cindex @code{subfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1041 @cindex @code{subfigure*}, LaTeX environment | |
1042 @code{subfigure}, @code{subfigure*}, the @code{\subfigure} macro | |
1043 (@file{subfigure.sty})@refill | |
1044 @item | |
1045 @cindex @code{supertab}, LaTeX package | |
1046 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{supertab} | |
1047 @cindex @code{supertabular}, LaTeX environment | |
1048 @code{supertabular} (@file{supertab.sty}) | |
1049 @item | |
1050 @cindex @code{wrapfig}, LaTeX package | |
1051 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{wrapfig} | |
1052 @cindex @code{wrapfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1053 @code{wrapfigure} (@file{wrapfig.sty}) | |
1054 @end itemize | |
1055 | |
1056 If you want to use other labeled environments, defined with | |
1057 @code{\newtheorem}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured to recognize | |
1058 them (@pxref{Defining Label Environments}).@refill | |
1059 | |
1060 @node Defining Label Environments, Reference Info, Builtin Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1061 @section Defining Label Environments | |
1062 @cindex Label environments, defining | |
1063 | |
1064 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
1065 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to recognize additional labeled | |
1066 environments and macros. This is done with the variable | |
1067 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@pxref{Options (Defining Label | |
1068 Environments)}). If you are not familiar with Lisp, you can use the | |
1069 @code{custom} library to configure this rather complex variable. To do | |
1070 this, use | |
1071 | |
1072 @example | |
1073 @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-label-alist @key{RET}} | |
1074 @end example | |
1075 | |
1076 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
1077 Here we will discuss a few examples, in order to make things clearer. | |
1078 It can also be instructive to look at the constant | |
1079 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin} which contains the entries for | |
1080 all the builtin environments and macros (@pxref{Builtin Label | |
1081 Environments}).@refill | |
1082 | |
1083 @menu | |
1084 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
1085 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
1086 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
1087 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
1088 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
1089 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
1090 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
1091 @end menu | |
1092 | |
1093 @node Theorem and Axiom, Quick Equation, , Defining Label Environments | |
1094 @subsection Theorem and Axiom Environments | |
1095 @cindex @code{theorem}, newtheorem | |
1096 @cindex @code{axiom}, newtheorem | |
1097 @cindex @code{\newtheorem} | |
1098 | |
1099 Suppose you are using @code{\newtheorem} in LaTeX in order to define two | |
1100 new environments, @code{theorem} and @code{axiom}@refill | |
1101 | |
1102 @example | |
1103 \newtheorem@{axiom@}@{Axiom@} | |
1104 \newtheorem@{theorem@}@{Theorem@} | |
1105 @end example | |
1106 | |
1107 @noindent | |
1108 to be used like this: | |
1109 | |
1110 @example | |
1111 \begin@{axiom@} | |
1112 \label@{ax:first@} | |
1113 .... | |
1114 \end@{axiom@} | |
1115 @end example | |
1116 | |
1117 So we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new | |
1118 labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can | |
1119 either use Lisp to do this (e.g. in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom | |
1120 library. With Lisp it would look like this | |
1121 | |
1122 @lisp | |
1123 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1124 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1125 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "th.") -3))) |
25829 | 1126 @end lisp |
1127 | |
1128 The type indicator characters @code{?a} and @code{?h} are used for | |
1129 prompts when @b{Ref@TeX{}} queries for a label type. @code{?h} | |
1130 was chosen for @code{theorem} since @code{?t} is already taken by | |
1131 @code{table}. Note that also @code{?s}, @code{?f}, @code{?e}, | |
1132 @code{?i}, @code{?n} are already used for standard environments.@refill | |
1133 | |
1134 @noindent | |
1135 The labels for Axioms and Theorems will have the prefixes @samp{ax:} and | |
1136 @samp{thr:}, respectively. @xref{AUCTeX}, for information on how | |
1137 AUCTeX can use @b{Ref@TeX{}} to automatically create labels when a new | |
1138 environment is inserted into a buffer.@refill | |
1139 | |
1140 @noindent | |
1141 The @samp{~\ref@{%s@}} is a format string indicating how to insert | |
1142 references to these labels.@refill | |
1143 | |
1144 @noindent | |
1145 The next item indicates how to grab context of the label definition.@refill | |
1146 @itemize @minus | |
1147 @item | |
1148 @code{t} means to get it from a default location (from the beginning of | |
1149 a @code{\macro} or after the @code{\begin} statement). @code{t} is | |
1150 @emph{not} a good choice for eqnarray and similar environments.@refill | |
1151 @item | |
1152 @code{nil} means to use the text right after the label definition.@refill | |
1153 @item | |
1154 For more complex ways of getting context, see the variable | |
1155 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@ref{Options (Defining Label | |
1156 Environments)}).@refill | |
1157 @end itemize | |
1158 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1159 The following list of strings is used to guess the correct label type |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1160 from the word before point when creating a reference. E.g. if you |
25829 | 1161 write: @samp{As we have shown in Theorem} and then press @kbd{C-c )}, |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1162 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that you are looking for a theorem label and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1163 restrict the menu to only these labels without even asking.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1164 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1165 The final item in each entry is the level at which the environment |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1166 should produce entries in the table of context buffer. If the number is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1167 positive, the environment will produce numbered entries (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1168 @code{\section}), if it is negative the entries will be unnumbered (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1169 @code{\section*}). Use this only for environments which structure the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1170 document similar to sectioning commands. For everything else, omit the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1171 item.@refill |
25829 | 1172 |
1173 To do the same configuration with @code{customize}, you need to click on | |
1174 the @code{[INS]} button twice to create two templates and fill them in | |
1175 like this:@refill | |
1176 | |
1177 @example | |
1178 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1179 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1180 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: axiom | |
1181 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : a | |
1182 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: ax: | |
1183 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1184 Context method : [Value Menu] After label | |
1185 Magic words: | |
1186 [INS] [DEL] String: axiom | |
1187 [INS] [DEL] String: ax. | |
1188 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1189 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -2 |
25829 | 1190 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: |
1191 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: theorem | |
1192 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : h | |
1193 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: thr: | |
1194 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1195 Context method : [Value Menu] Default position | |
1196 Magic words: | |
1197 [INS] [DEL] String: theorem | |
1198 [INS] [DEL] String: theor. | |
1199 [INS] [DEL] String: th. | |
1200 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1201 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -3 |
25829 | 1202 @end example |
1203 | |
1204 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
1205 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
1206 Depending on how you would like the label insertion and selection for | |
1207 the new environments to work, you might want to add the letters @samp{a} | |
1208 and @samp{h} to some of the flags in the variables | |
1209 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating Labels)}) | |
1210 and @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing | |
1211 Labels)}).@refill | |
1212 | |
1213 | |
1214 @node Quick Equation, Figure Wrapper, Theorem and Axiom , Defining Label Environments | |
1215 @subsection Quick Equation Macro | |
1216 @cindex Quick equation macro | |
1217 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1218 | |
1219 Suppose you would like to have a macro for quick equations. It | |
1220 could be defined like this: | |
1221 | |
1222 @example | |
1223 \newcommand@{\quickeq@}[1]@{\begin@{equation@} #1 \end@{equation@}@} | |
1224 @end example | |
1225 | |
1226 @noindent | |
1227 and used like this: | |
1228 | |
1229 @example | |
1230 Einstein's equation is \quickeq@{E=mc^2 \label@{eq:einstein@}@}. | |
1231 @end example | |
1232 | |
1233 We need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that any label defined in the argument of the | |
1234 @code{\quickeq} is an equation label. Here is how to do this with lisp: | |
1235 | |
1236 @lisp | |
1237 (setq reftex-label-alist '(("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil))) | |
1238 @end lisp | |
1239 | |
1240 The first element in this list is now the macro with empty braces as an | |
1241 @emph{image} of the macro arguments. @code{?e} indicates that this is | |
1242 an equation label, the different @code{nil} elements indicate to use the | |
1243 default values for equations. The @samp{1} as the fifth element | |
1244 indicates that the context of the label definition should be the 1st | |
1245 argument of the macro.@refill | |
1246 | |
1247 Here is again how this would look in the customization buffer: | |
1248 | |
1249 @example | |
1250 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1251 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1252 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \quickeq@{@} | |
1253 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : e | |
1254 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
1255 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1256 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 1 | |
1257 Magic words: | |
1258 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1259 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1260 @end example |
1261 | |
1262 @node Figure Wrapper, Adding Magic Words, Quick Equation, Defining Label Environments | |
1263 @subsection Figure Wrapping Macro | |
1264 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1265 @cindex Figure wrapping macro | |
1266 | |
1267 Suppose you want to make figures not directly with the figure | |
1268 environment, but with a macro like | |
1269 | |
1270 @example | |
1271 \newcommand@{\myfig@}[5][tbp]@{% | |
1272 \begin@{figure@}[#1] | |
1273 \epsimp[#5]@{#2@} | |
1274 \caption@{#3@} | |
1275 \label@{#4@} | |
1276 \end@{figure@}@} | |
1277 @end example | |
1278 | |
1279 @noindent | |
1280 which would be called like | |
1281 | |
1282 @example | |
1283 \myfig[htp]@{filename@}@{caption text@}@{label@}@{1@} | |
1284 @end example | |
1285 | |
1286 Now we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that the 4th argument of the | |
1287 @code{\myfig} macro @emph{is itself} a figure label, and where to find | |
1288 the context.@refill | |
1289 | |
1290 @lisp | |
1291 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1292 '(("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3))) | |
1293 @end lisp | |
1294 | |
1295 The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the | |
1296 @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} | |
1297 indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with | |
1298 labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for | |
1299 prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. | |
1300 The @samp{3} for the context method means to grab the 3rd macro argument | |
1301 - the caption.@refill | |
1302 | |
1303 As a side effect of this configuration, @code{reftex-label} will now | |
1304 insert the required naked label (without the @code{\label} macro) when | |
1305 point is directly after the opening parenthesis of a @code{\myfig} macro | |
1306 argument.@refill | |
1307 | |
1308 Again, here the configuration in the customization buffer: | |
1309 | |
1310 @example | |
1311 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1312 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@} | |
1313 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : f | |
1314 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
1315 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1316 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 3 | |
1317 Magic words: | |
1318 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1319 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1320 @end example |
1321 | |
1322 @node Adding Magic Words, Using \eqref, Figure Wrapper, Defining Label Environments | |
1323 @subsection Adding Magic Words | |
1324 @cindex Magic words | |
1325 @cindex German magic words | |
1326 @cindex Label category | |
1327 | |
1328 Sometimes you don't want to define a new label environment or macro, but | |
1329 just change the information associated with a label category. Maybe you | |
1330 want to add some magic words, for another language. Changing only the | |
1331 information associated with a label category is done by giving | |
1332 @code{nil} for the environment name and then specify the items you want | |
1333 to define. Here is an example which adds German magic words to all | |
1334 predefined label categories.@refill | |
1335 | |
1336 @lisp | |
1337 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1338 '((nil ?s nil nil nil ("Kapitel" "Kap." "Abschnitt" "Teil")) | |
1339 (nil ?e nil nil nil ("Gleichung" "Gl.")) | |
1340 (nil ?t nil nil nil ("Tabelle")) | |
1341 (nil ?f nil nil nil ("Figur" "Abbildung" "Abb.")) | |
1342 (nil ?n nil nil nil ("Anmerkung" "Anm.")) | |
1343 (nil ?i nil nil nil ("Punkt")))) | |
1344 @end lisp | |
1345 | |
1346 @node Using \eqref, Non-Standard Environments, Adding Magic Words, Defining Label Environments | |
1347 @subsection Using @code{\eqref} | |
1348 @cindex @code{\eqref}, AMS-LaTeX macro | |
1349 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1350 @cindex Label category | |
1351 | |
1352 Another case where one only wants to change the information associated | |
1353 with the label category is to change the macro which is used for | |
1354 referencing the label. When working with the AMS-LaTeX stuff, you might | |
1355 prefer @code{\eqref} for doing equation references. Here is how to | |
1356 do this: | |
1357 | |
1358 @lisp | |
1359 (setq reftex-label-alist '((nil ?e nil "~\\eqref@{%s@}" nil nil))) | |
1360 @end lisp | |
1361 | |
1362 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has also a predefined symbol for this special purpose. The | |
1363 following is equivalent to the line above.@refill | |
1364 | |
1365 @lisp | |
1366 (setq reftex-label-alist '(AMSTeX)) | |
1367 @end lisp | |
1368 | |
1369 Note that this is automatically done by the @file{amsmath.el} style file | |
1370 of AUCTeX (@pxref{Style Files}) - so if you use AUCTeX, | |
1371 this configuration will not be necessary.@refill | |
1372 | |
1373 @node Non-Standard Environments, Putting it Together, Using \eqref, Defining Label Environments | |
1374 @subsection Non-standard Environments | |
1375 @cindex Non-standard environments | |
1376 @cindex Environments without @code{\begin} | |
1377 @cindex Special parser functions | |
1378 @cindex Parser functions, for special environments | |
1379 | |
1380 Some LaTeX packages define environment-like structures without using the | |
1381 standard @samp{\begin..\end} structure. @b{Ref@TeX{}} cannot parse | |
1382 these directly, but you can write your own special-purpose parser and | |
1383 use it instead of the name of an environment in an entry for | |
1384 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The function should check if point is | |
1385 currently in the special environment it was written to detect. If so, | |
1386 it must return a buffer position indicating the start of this | |
1387 environment. The return value must be @code{nil} on failure to detect | |
1388 the environment. The function is called with one argument @var{bound}. | |
1389 If non-@code{nil}, @var{bound} is a boundary for backwards searches | |
1390 which should be observed. We will discuss two examples.@refill | |
1391 | |
1392 @cindex LaTeX commands, abbreviated | |
1393 | |
1394 Some people define abbreviations for | |
1395 environments, like @code{\be} for @code{\begin@{equation@}}, and | |
1396 @code{\ee} for @code{\end@{equation@}}. The parser function would have | |
1397 to search backward for these macros. When the first match is | |
1398 @code{\ee}, point is not in this environment. When the first match is | |
1399 @code{\be}, point is in this environment and the function must return | |
1400 the beginning of the match. To avoid scanning too far, we can also look | |
1401 for empty lines which cannot occure inside an equation environment. | |
1402 Here is the setup:@refill | |
1403 | |
1404 @lisp | |
1405 ;; Setup entry in reftex-label-alist, using all defaults for equations | |
1406 (setq reftex-label-alist '((detect-be-ee ?e nil nil nil nil))) | |
1407 | |
1408 (defun detect-be-ee (bound) | |
1409 ;; Search backward for the macros or an empty line | |
1410 (if (re-search-backward | |
1411 "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\|\\\\ee\\>\\)\\|\\(\\\\be\\>\\)" bound t) | |
1412 (if (match-beginning 2) | |
1413 (match-beginning 2) ; Return start of environment | |
1414 nil) ; Return nil because env is closed | |
1415 nil)) ; Return nil for not found | |
1416 @end lisp | |
1417 | |
1418 @cindex @code{linguex}, LaTeX package | |
1419 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{linguex} | |
1420 A more complex example is the @file{linguex.sty} package which defines | |
1421 list macros @samp{\ex.}, @samp{\a.}, @samp{\b.} etc. for lists which are | |
1422 terminated by @samp{\z.} or by an empty line.@refill | |
1423 | |
1424 @example | |
1425 \ex. \label@{ex:12@} Some text in an exotic language ... | |
1426 \a. \label@{ex:13@} more stuff | |
1427 \b. \label@{ex:14@} still more stuff | |
1428 \a. List on a deeper level | |
1429 \b. Another item | |
1430 \b. and the third one | |
1431 \z. | |
1432 \b. Third item on this level. | |
1433 | |
1434 ... text after the empty line terminating all lists | |
1435 @end example | |
1436 | |
1437 The difficulty is that the @samp{\a.} lists can nest and that an empty | |
1438 line terminates all list levels in one go. So we have to count nesting | |
1439 levels between @samp{\a.} and @samp{\z.}. Here is the implementation | |
1440 for @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
1441 | |
1442 @lisp | |
1443 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1444 '((detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1445 | |
1446 (defun detect-linguex (bound) | |
1447 (let ((cnt 0)) | |
1448 (catch 'exit | |
1449 (while | |
1450 ;; Search backward for all possible delimiters | |
1451 (re-search-backward | |
1452 (concat "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\)\\|\\(\\\\z\\.\\)\\|" | |
1453 "\\(\\ex[ig]?\\.\\)\\|\\(\\\\a\\.\\)") | |
1454 nil t) | |
1455 ;; Check which delimiter was matched. | |
1456 (cond | |
1457 ((match-beginning 1) | |
1458 ;; empty line terminates all - return nil | |
1459 (throw 'exit nil)) | |
1460 ((match-beginning 2) | |
1461 ;; \z. terminates one list level - decrease nesting count | |
1462 (decf cnt)) | |
1463 ((match-beginning 3) | |
1464 ;; \ex. : return match unless there was a \z. on this level | |
1465 (throw 'exit (if (>= cnt 0) (match-beginning 3) nil))) | |
1466 ((match-beginning 4) | |
1467 ;; \a. : return match when on level 0, otherwise | |
1468 ;; increment nesting count | |
1469 (if (>= cnt 0) | |
1470 (throw 'exit (match-beginning 4)) | |
1471 (incf cnt)))))))) | |
1472 @end lisp | |
1473 | |
1474 @node Putting it Together, , Non-Standard Environments, Defining Label Environments | |
1475 @subsection Putting it all together | |
1476 | |
1477 When you have to put several entries into @code{reftex-label-alist}, just | |
1478 put them after each other in a list, or create that many templates in | |
1479 the customization buffer. Here is a lisp example which uses several of | |
1480 the entries described above: | |
1481 | |
1482 @lisp | |
1483 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1484 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1485 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "theor." "th.") -3) |
25829 | 1486 ("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil) |
1487 AMSTeX | |
1488 ("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3) | |
1489 (detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1490 @end lisp | |
1491 | |
1492 @node Reference Info, xr (LaTeX package), Defining Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1493 @section Reference Info | |
1494 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
1495 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1496 @cindex Cross-references, displaying | |
1497 @cindex Reference info | |
1498 @cindex Displaying cross-references | |
1499 @cindex Viewing cross-references | |
1500 @kindex C-c & | |
1501 @kindex S-mouse-2 | |
1502 | |
1503 When point is idle on the argument of a @code{\ref} macro, the echo area | |
1504 will display some information about the label referenced there. Note | |
1505 that the information is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied | |
1506 by a different message. | |
1507 | |
1508 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the label definition corresponding to a | |
1509 @code{\ref} macro, or all reference locations corresponding to a | |
1510 @code{\label} macro. @xref{Viewing Cross-References}, for more | |
1511 information.@refill | |
1512 | |
1513 @node xr (LaTeX package), varioref (LaTeX package), Reference Info, Labels and References | |
1514 @section @code{xr}: Cross-Document References | |
1515 @cindex @code{xr}, LaTeX package | |
1516 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{xr} | |
1517 @cindex @code{\externaldocument} | |
1518 @cindex External documents | |
1519 @cindex References to external documents | |
1520 @cindex Cross-document references | |
1521 | |
1522 The LaTeX package @code{xr} makes it possible to create references to | |
1523 labels defined in external documents. The preamble of a document using | |
1524 @code{xr} will contain something like this:@refill | |
1525 | |
1526 @example | |
1527 \usepackage@{xr@} | |
1528 \externaldocument[V1-]@{volume1@} | |
1529 \externaldocument[V3-]@{volume3@} | |
1530 @end example | |
1531 | |
1532 @noindent | |
1533 and we can make references to any labels defined in these | |
1534 external documents by using the prefixes @samp{V1-} and @samp{V3-}, | |
1535 respectively.@refill | |
1536 | |
1537 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be used to create such references as well. Start the | |
1538 referencing process normally, by pressing @kbd{C-c )}. Select a label | |
1539 type if necessary. When you see the label selection buffer, pressing | |
1540 @kbd{x} will switch to the label selection buffer of one of the external | |
1541 documents. You may then select a label as before and @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
1542 insert it along with the required prefix.@refill | |
1543 | |
1544 For this kind of inter-document cross-references, saving of parsing | |
1545 information and the use of multiple selection buffers can mean a large | |
1546 speed-up (@pxref{Optimizations}).@refill | |
1547 | |
1548 @node varioref (LaTeX package), fancyref (LaTeX package), xr (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1549 @section @code{varioref}: Variable Page References | |
1550 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
1551 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
1552 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
1553 @vindex reftex-vref-is-default | |
1554 @code{varioref} is a frequently used LaTeX package to create | |
1555 cross--references with page information. When you want to make a | |
1556 reference with the @code{\vref} macro, just press the @kbd{v} key in the | |
1557 selection buffer to toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} | |
1558 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1559 shows the current status of this switch. If you find that you almost | |
1560 always use @code{\vref}, you may want to make it the default by | |
1561 customizing the variable @code{reftex-vref-is-default}. If this | |
1562 toggling seems too inconvenient, you can also use the command | |
1563 @code{reftex-varioref-vref}@footnote{bind it to @kbd{C-c v}.}. | |
1564 Or use AUCTeX to create your macros (@pxref{AUCTeX}).@refill | |
1565 | |
1566 @node fancyref (LaTeX package), , varioref (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1567 @section @code{fancyref}: Fancy Cross References | |
1568 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
1569 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
1570 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
1571 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
1572 @vindex reftex-fref-is-default | |
1573 @code{fancyref} is a LaTeX package where a macro call like | |
1574 @code{\fref@{@var{fig:map-of-germany}@}} creates not only the number of | |
1575 the referenced counter but also the complete text around it, like | |
1576 @samp{Figure 3 on the preceding page}. In order to make it work you | |
1577 need to use label prefixes like @samp{fig:} consistently - something | |
1578 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does automatically. When you want to make a reference | |
1579 with the @code{\fref} macro, just press the @kbd{V} key in the selection | |
1580 buffer to cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} | |
1581 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1582 shows the current status of this switch. If this cycling seems | |
1583 inconvenient, you can also use the commands @code{reftex-fancyref-fref} | |
1584 and @code{reftex-fancyref-Fref}@footnote{bind them to @kbd{C-c | |
1585 f} and @kbd{C-c F}.}. Or use AUCTeX to create your macros | |
1586 (@pxref{AUCTeX}).@refill | |
1587 | |
1588 @node Citations, Index Support, Labels and References, Top | |
1589 @chapter Citations | |
1590 @cindex Citations | |
1591 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
1592 | |
1593 Citations in LaTeX are done with the @code{\cite} macro or variations of | |
1594 it. The argument of the macro is a citation key which identifies an | |
1595 article or book in either a BibTeX database file or in an explicit | |
1596 @code{thebibliography} environment in the document. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
1597 support for citations helps to select the correct key quickly.@refill | |
1598 | |
1599 @menu | |
1600 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
1601 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
1602 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
1603 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
1604 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
1605 @end menu | |
1606 | |
1607 @node Creating Citations, Citation Styles, , Citations | |
1608 @section Creating Citations | |
1609 @cindex Creating citations | |
1610 @cindex Citations, creating | |
1611 @findex reftex-citation | |
1612 @kindex C-c [ | |
1613 @cindex Selection buffer, citations | |
1614 @cindex Selection process | |
1615 | |
1616 In order to create a citation, press @kbd{C-c [}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} then | |
1617 prompts for a regular expression which will be used to search through | |
1618 the database and present the list of matches to choose from in a | |
1619 selection process similar to that for selecting labels | |
1620 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
1621 | |
1622 The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a | |
1623 logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example | |
1624 @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention | |
1625 Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and | |
1626 Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on | |
1627 known citation keys.@refill | |
1628 | |
1629 @cindex @code{\bibliography} | |
1630 @cindex @code{thebibliography}, LaTeX environment | |
1631 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
1632 @cindex @code{TEXBIB}, environment variable | |
1633 @b{Ref@TeX{}} prefers to use BibTeX database files specified with a | |
1634 @code{\bibliography} macro to collect its information. Just like | |
1635 BibTeX, it will search for the specified files in the current directory | |
1636 and along the path given in the environment variable @code{BIBINPUTS}. | |
1637 If you do not use BibTeX, but the document contains an explicit | |
1638 @code{thebibliography} environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will collect its | |
1639 information from there. Note that in this case the information | |
1640 presented in the selection buffer will just be a copy of relevant | |
1641 @code{\bibitem} entries, not the structured listing available with | |
1642 BibTeX database files.@refill | |
1643 | |
1644 @kindex ? | |
1645 In the selection buffer, the following keys provide special commands. A | |
1646 summary of this information is always available from the selection | |
1647 process by pressing @kbd{?}.@refill | |
1648 | |
1649 @table @kbd | |
1650 @tablesubheading{General} | |
1651 @item ? | |
1652 Show a summary of available commands. | |
1653 | |
1654 @item 0-9,- | |
1655 Prefix argument. | |
1656 | |
1657 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
1658 @item n | |
1659 Go to next article. | |
1660 | |
1661 @item p | |
1662 Go to previous article. | |
1663 | |
1664 @tablesubheading{Access to full database entries} | |
1665 @item @key{SPC} | |
1666 Show the database entry corresponding to the article at point, in | |
1667 another window. See also the @kbd{f} key.@refill | |
1668 | |
1669 @item f | |
1670 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
1671 always display the full database entry of the current article. This is | |
1672 equivalent to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. With BibTeX | |
1673 entries, follow mode can be rather slow.@refill | |
1674 | |
1675 @tablesubheading{Selecting entries and creating the citation} | |
1676 @item @key{RET} | |
1677 Insert a citation referencing the article at point into the buffer from | |
1678 which the selection process was started.@refill | |
1679 | |
1680 @item mouse-2 | |
1681 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection | |
1682 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a citation will accept it like @key{RET} | |
1683 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
1684 (Misc)}.@refill | |
1685 | |
1686 @item m | |
1687 Mark the current entry. When one or several entries are marked, | |
1688 pressing @kbd{a} or @kbd{A} accepts all marked entries. Also, | |
1689 @key{RET} behaves like the @kbd{a} key. | |
1690 | |
1691 @item u | |
1692 Unmark a marked entry. | |
1693 | |
1694 @item a | |
1695 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a single | |
1696 @code{\cite} macro referring to them.@refill | |
1697 | |
1698 @item A | |
1699 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a | |
1700 separate @code{\cite} macro for each of it.@refill | |
1701 | |
1702 @item @key{TAB} | |
1703 Enter a citation key with completion. This may also be a key which does | |
1704 not yet exist. | |
1705 | |
1706 @item . | |
1707 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
1708 called @code{reftex-citation}.@refill | |
1709 | |
1710 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
1711 @item q | |
1712 Exit the selection process without inserting a citation into the | |
1713 buffer.@refill | |
1714 | |
1715 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
1716 | |
1717 @item g | |
1718 Start over with a new regular expression. The full database will be | |
1719 rescanned with the new expression (see also @kbd{r}).@refill | |
1720 | |
1721 @c FIXME: Should we use something else here? r is usually rescan! | |
1722 @item r | |
1723 Refine the current selection with another regular expression. This will | |
1724 @emph{not} rescan the entire database, but just the already selected | |
1725 entries.@refill | |
1726 | |
1727 @end table | |
1728 | |
1729 @vindex reftex-select-bib-map | |
1730 In order to define additional commands for this selection process, the | |
1731 keymap @code{reftex-select-bib-map} may be used.@refill | |
1732 | |
1733 @node Citation Styles, Citation Info, Creating Citations, Citations | |
1734 @section Citation Styles | |
1735 @cindex Citation styles | |
1736 @cindex Citation styles, @code{natbib} | |
1737 @cindex Citation styles, @code{harvard} | |
1738 @cindex Citation styles, @code{chicago} | |
1739 @cindex @code{natbib}, citation style | |
1740 @cindex @code{harvard}, citation style | |
1741 @cindex @code{chicago}, citation style | |
1742 | |
1743 @vindex reftex-cite-format | |
1744 The standard LaTeX macro @code{\cite} works well with numeric or simple | |
1745 key citations. To deal with the more complex task of author-year | |
1746 citations as used in many natural sciences, a variety of packages has | |
1747 been developed which define derived forms of the @code{\cite} macro. | |
1748 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to produce these citation macros as well by | |
1749 setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. For the most commonly | |
1750 used packages (@code{natbib}, @code{harvard}, @code{chicago}) this may | |
1751 be done from the menu, under @code{Ref->Citation Styles}. Since there | |
1752 are usually several macros to create the citations, executing | |
1753 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-c [}) starts by prompting for the correct | |
1754 macro. For the Natbib style, this looks like this: | |
1755 | |
1756 @example | |
1757 SELECT A CITATION FORMAT | |
1758 | |
1759 [^M] \cite@{%l@} | |
1760 [t] \citet@{%l@} | |
1761 [T] \citet*@{%l@} | |
1762 [p] \citep@{%l@} | |
1763 [P] \citep*@{%l@} | |
1764 [e] \citep[e.g.][]@{%l@} | |
1765 [s] \citep[see][]@{%l@} | |
1766 [a] \citeauthor@{%l@} | |
1767 [A] \citeauthor*@{%l@} | |
1768 [y] \citeyear@{%l@} | |
1769 @end example | |
1770 | |
1771 Following the most generic of these packages, @code{natbib}, the builtin | |
1772 citation packages always accept the @kbd{t} key for a @emph{textual} | |
1773 citation (like: @code{Jones et al. (1997) have shown...}) as well as | |
1774 the @kbd{p} key for a parenthetical citation (like: @code{As shown | |
1775 earlier (Jones et al, 1997)}).@refill | |
1776 | |
1777 To make one of these styles the default, customize the variable | |
1778 @code{reftex-cite-format} or put into @file{.emacs}: | |
1779 | |
1780 @lisp | |
1781 (setq reftex-cite-format 'natbib) | |
1782 @end lisp | |
1783 | |
1784 You can also use AUCTeX style files to automatically set the | |
1785 citation style based on the @code{usepackage} commands in a given | |
1786 document. @xref{Style Files}, for information on how to set up the style | |
1787 files correctly.@refill | |
1788 | |
1789 @node Citation Info, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citation Styles, Citations, Top | |
1790 @section Citation Info | |
1791 @cindex Displaying citations | |
1792 @cindex Citations, displaying | |
1793 @cindex Citation info | |
1794 @cindex Viewing citations | |
1795 @kindex C-c & | |
1796 @kindex S-mouse-2 | |
1797 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
1798 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1799 | |
1800 When point is idle on the argument of a @code{\cite} macro, the echo area | |
1801 will display some information about the article cited there. Note | |
1802 that the information is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied | |
1803 by a different message. | |
1804 | |
1805 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database | |
1806 entry corresponding to a @code{\cite} macro, or all citation locations | |
1807 corresponding to a @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database entry. | |
1808 @xref{Viewing Cross-References}.@refill | |
1809 | |
1810 @node Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations Outside LaTeX, Citation Info, Citations | |
1811 @section Chapterbib and Bibunits | |
1812 @cindex @code{chapterbib}, LaTeX package | |
1813 @cindex @code{bibunits}, LaTeX package | |
1814 @cindex Bibliographies, multiple | |
1815 | |
1816 @code{chapterbib} and @code{bibunits} are two LaTeX packages which | |
1817 produce multiple bibliographies in a document. This is no problem for | |
1818 @b{Ref@TeX{}} as long as all bibliographies use the same BibTeX database | |
1819 files. If they do not, it is best to have each document part in a | |
1820 separate file (as it is required for @code{chapterbib} anyway). Then | |
1821 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will still scan the locally relevant databases correctly. If | |
1822 you have multiple bibliographies within a @emph{single file}, this may | |
1823 or may not be the case. | |
1824 | |
1825 @node Citations Outside LaTeX, , Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations | |
1826 @section Citations outside LaTeX | |
1827 @cindex Citations outside LaTeX | |
1828 @vindex reftex-default-bibliography | |
1829 | |
1830 The command @code{reftex-citation} can also be executed outside a LaTeX | |
1831 buffer. This can be useful to reference articles in the mail buffer and | |
1832 other documents. You should @emph{not} enter @code{reftex-mode} for | |
1833 this, just execute the command. The list of BibTeX files will in this | |
1834 case be taken from the variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
1835 Setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} to the symbol | |
1836 @code{locally} does a decent job of putting all relevant information | |
1837 about a citation directly into the buffer. Here is the lisp code to add | |
1838 the @kbd{C-c [} binding to the mail buffer. It also provides a local | |
1839 binding for @code{reftex-cite-format}.@refill | |
1840 | |
1841 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1842 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1843 (lambda () (define-key mail-mode-map "\C-c[" |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1844 (lambda () (interactive) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1845 (require 'reftex) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1846 (let ((reftex-cite-format 'locally)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1847 (reftex-citation)))))) |
25829 | 1848 @end lisp |
1849 | |
1850 @node Index Support, Viewing Cross-References, Citations, Top | |
1851 @chapter Index Support | |
1852 @cindex Index Support | |
1853 @cindex @code{\index} | |
1854 | |
1855 LaTeX has builtin support for creating an Index. The LaTeX core | |
1856 supports two different indices, the standard index and a glossary. With | |
1857 the help of special LaTeX packages (@file{multind.sty} or | |
1858 @file{index.sty}), any number of indices can be supported. | |
1859 | |
1860 Index entries are created with the @code{\index@{@var{entry}@}} macro. | |
1861 All entries defined in a document are written out to the @file{.aux} | |
1862 file. A separate tool must be used to convert this information into a | |
1863 nicely formatted index. Tools used with LaTeX include @code{MakeIndex} | |
1864 and @code{xindy}.@refill | |
1865 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1866 Indexing is a very difficult task. It must follow strict conventions to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1867 make the index consistent and complete. There are basically two |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1868 approaches one can follow, and both have their merits. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1869 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1870 @enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1871 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1872 Part of the indexing should already be done with the markup. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1873 document structure should be reflected in the index, so when starting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1874 new sections, the basic topics of the section should be indexed. If the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1875 document contains definitions, theorems or the like, these should all |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1876 correspond to appropriate index entries. This part of the index can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1877 very well be developed along with the document. Often it is worthwhile |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1878 to define special purpose macros which define an item and at the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1879 time make an index entry, possibly with special formatting to make the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1880 reference page in the index bold or underlined. To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1881 support for indexing possible, these special macros must be added to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1882 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}).@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1883 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1884 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1885 The rest of the index is often just a collection of where in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1886 document certain words or phrases are being used. This part is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1887 difficult to develop along with the document, because consistent entries |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1888 for each occurrence are needed and are best selected when the document |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1889 is ready. @b{Ref@TeX{}} supports this with an @emph{index phrases file} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1890 which collects phrases and helps indexing the phrases globally.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1891 @end enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1892 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1893 Before you start, you need to make sure that @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1894 the index style being used in the current document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1895 builtin support for the default @code{\index} and @code{\glossary} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1896 macros. Other LaTeX packages, like the @file{multind} or @file{index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1897 package, redefine the @code{\index} macro to have an additional |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1898 argument, and @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured for those. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1899 sufficiently new version of AUCTeX (9.10c or later) will do this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1900 automatically. If you really don't use AUCTeX (you should!), this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1901 configuration needs to be done by hand with the menu (@code{Ref->Index |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1902 Style}), or globally for all your documents with@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1903 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1904 @lisp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1905 (setq reftex-index-macros '(multind)) @r{or} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1906 (setq reftex-index-macros '(index)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1907 @end lisp |
25829 | 1908 |
1909 @menu | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1910 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1911 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1912 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 1913 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
1914 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
1915 @end menu | |
1916 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1917 @node Creating Index Entries, The Index Phrases File, , Index Support |
25829 | 1918 @section Creating Index Entries |
1919 @cindex Creating index entries | |
1920 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
1921 @kindex C-c < | |
1922 @findex reftex-index | |
1923 @kindex C-c / | |
1924 @findex reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
1925 | |
1926 In order to index the current selection or the word at the cursor press | |
1927 @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). This causes the | |
1928 selection or word @samp{@var{word}} to be replaced with | |
1929 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}}. The macro which is used | |
1930 (@code{\index} by default) can be configured with the variable | |
1931 @code{reftex-index-default-macro}. When the command is called with a | |
1932 prefix argument (@kbd{C-u C-c /}), you get a chance to edit the | |
1933 generated index entry. Use this to change the case of the word or to | |
1934 make the entry a subentry, for example by entering | |
1935 @samp{main!sub!@var{word}}. When called with two raw @kbd{C-u} prefixes | |
1936 (@kbd{C-u C-u C-c /}), you will be asked for the index macro as well. | |
1937 When there is nothing selected and no word at point, this command will | |
1938 just call @code{reftex-index}, described below. | |
1939 | |
1940 In order to create a general index entry, press @kbd{C-c <} | |
1941 (@code{reftex-index}). @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for one of the | |
1942 available index macros and for its arguments. Completion will be | |
1943 available for the index entry and, if applicable, the index tag. The | |
1944 index tag is a string identifying one of multiple indices. With the | |
1945 @file{multind} and @file{index} packages, this tag is the first argument | |
1946 to the redefined @code{\index} macro.@refill | |
1947 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1948 @node The Index Phrases File, Displaying and Editing the Index, Creating Index Entries, Index Support |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1949 @section The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1950 @cindex Index phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1951 @cindex Phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1952 @kindex C-c | |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1953 @findex reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1954 @cindex Macro definition lines, in phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1955 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1956 @b{Ref@TeX{}} maintains a file in which phrases can be collected for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1957 later indexing. The file is located in the same directory as the master |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1958 file of the document and has the extension @file{.rip} (@b{R}eftex |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1959 @b{I}ndex @b{P}hrases). You can create or visit the file with @kbd{C-c |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1960 |} (@code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer}). If the file is empty it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1961 is initialized by inserting a file header which contains the definition |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1962 of the available index macros. This list is initialized from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1963 @code{reftex-index-macros} (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). You can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1964 edit the header as needed, but if you define new LaTeX indexing macros, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1965 don't forget to add them to @code{reftex-index-macros} as well. Here is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1966 a phrase file header example:@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1967 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1968 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1969 % -*- mode: reftex-index-phrases -*- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1970 % Key Macro Format Repeat |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1971 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1972 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: i \index@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1973 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: I \index*@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1974 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: g \glossary@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1975 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: n \index*[name]@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1976 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1977 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1978 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1979 The macro definition lines consist of a unique letter identifying a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1980 macro, a format string and the @var{repeat} flag, all separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1981 @key{TAB}. The format string shows how the macro is to be applied, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1982 @samp{%s} will be replaced with the index entry. The repeat flag |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1983 indicates if @var{word} is indexed by the macro as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1984 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}} (@var{repeat} = @code{nil}) or as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1985 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}} (@var{repeat} = @code{t}). In the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1986 above example it is assumed that the macro @code{\index*@{@var{word}@}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1987 already typesets its argument in the text, so that it is unnecessary to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1988 repeat @var{word} outside the macro.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1989 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1990 @menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1991 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1992 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1993 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1994 @end menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1995 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1996 @node Collecting Phrases, Consistency Checks, , The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1997 @subsection Collecting Phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1998 @cindex Collecting index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1999 @cindex Index phrases, collection |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2000 @cindex Phrases, collecting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2001 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2002 Phrases for indexing can be collected while writing the document. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2003 command @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2004 copies the current selection (if active) or the word near point into the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2005 phrases buffer. It then selects this buffer, so that the phrase line |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2006 can be edited. To return to the LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c C-c} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2007 (@code{reftex-index-phrases-save-and-return}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2008 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2009 You can also prepare the list of index phrases in a different way and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2010 copy it into the phrases file. For example you might want to start from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2011 a word list of the document and remove all words which should not be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2012 indexed. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2013 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2014 The phrase lines in the phrase buffer must have a specific format. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2015 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use font-lock to indicate if a line has the proper |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2016 format. A phrase line looks like this: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2017 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2018 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2019 [@var{key}] <TABs> @var{phrase} [<TABs> @var{arg}[&&@var{arg}]... [ || @var{arg}]...] |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2020 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2021 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2022 @code{<TABs>} stands for white space containing at least one @key{TAB}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2023 @var{key} must be at the start of the line and is the character |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2024 identifying one of the macros defined in the file header. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2025 optional - when omitted, the first macro definition line in the file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2026 will be used for this phrase. The @var{phrase} is the phrase to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2027 searched for when indexing. It may contain several words separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2028 spaces. By default the search phrase is also the text entered as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2029 argument of the index macro. If you want the index entry to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2030 different from the search phrase, enter another @key{TAB} and the index |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2031 argument @var{arg}. If you want to have each match produce several |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2032 index entries, separate the different index arguments with @samp{ && |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2033 }@footnote{@samp{&&} with optional spaces, see |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2034 @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp}.}. If you want to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2035 able to choose at each match between several different index arguments, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2036 separate them with @samp{ || }@footnote{@samp{||} with optional spaces, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2037 see @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.}. Here is an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2038 example:@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2039 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2040 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2041 %-------------------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2042 I Sun |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2043 i Planet Planets |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2044 i Vega Stars!Vega |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2045 Jupiter Planets!Jupiter |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2046 i Mars Planets!Mars || Gods!Mars || Chocolate Bars!Mars |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2047 i Pluto Planets!Pluto && Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2048 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2049 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2050 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2051 So @samp{Sun} will be indexed directly as @samp{\index*@{Sun@}}, while |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2052 @samp{Planet} will be indexed as @samp{\index@{Planets@}Planet}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2053 @samp{Vega} will be indexed as a subitem of @samp{Stars}. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2054 @samp{Jupiter} line will also use the @samp{i} macro as it was the first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2055 macro definition in the file header (see above example). At each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2056 occurrence of @samp{Mars} you will be able choose between indexing it as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2057 a subitem of @samp{Planets}, @samp{Gods} or @samp{Chocolate Bars}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2058 Finally, every occurrence of @samp{Pluto} will be indexed as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2059 @samp{\index@{Planets!Pluto@}\index@{Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto@}Pluto} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2060 and will therefore create two different index entries.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2061 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2062 @node Consistency Checks, Global Indexing, Collecting Phrases, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2063 @subsection Consistency Checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2064 @cindex Index phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2065 @cindex Phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2066 @cindex Consistency check for index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2067 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2068 @kindex C-c C-s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2069 Before indexing the phrases in the phrases buffer, they should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2070 checked carefully for consistency. A first step is to sort the phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2071 alphabetically - this is done with the command @kbd{C-c C-s} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2072 (@code{reftex-index-sort-phrases}). It will sort all phrases in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2073 buffer alphabetically by search phrase. If you want to group certain |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2074 phrases and only sort within the groups, insert empty lines between the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2075 groups. Sorting will only change the sequence of phrases within each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2076 group (see the variable @code{reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks}).@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2077 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2078 @kindex C-c C-i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2079 A useful command is @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{reftex-index-phrases-info}) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2080 which lists information about the phrase at point, including an example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2081 of how the index entry will look like and the number of expected matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2082 in the document.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2083 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2084 @kindex C-c C-t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2085 Another important check is to find out if there are double or |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2086 overlapping entries in the buffer. For example if you are first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2087 searching and indexing @samp{Mars} and then @samp{Planet Mars}, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2088 second phrase will not match because of the index macro inserted before |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2089 @samp{Mars} earlier. The command @kbd{C-c C-t} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2090 (@code{reftex-index-find-next-conflict-phrase}) finds the next phrase in |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2091 the buffer which is either duplicate or a subphrase of another phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2092 In order to check the whole buffer like this, start at the beginning and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2093 execute this command repeatedly.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2094 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2095 @node Global Indexing, , Consistency Checks, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2096 @subsection Global Indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2097 @cindex Global indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2098 @cindex Indexing, global |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2099 @cindex Indexing, from @file{phrases} buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2100 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2101 Once the index phrases have been collected and organized, you are set |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2102 for global indexing. I recommend to do this only on an otherwise |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2103 finished document. Global indexing starts from the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2104 There are several commands which start indexing: @kbd{C-c C-x} acts on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2105 the current phrase line, @kbd{C-c C-r} on all lines in the current |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2106 region and @kbd{C-c C-a} on all phrase lines in the buffer. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2107 probably good to do indexing in small chunks since your concentration |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2108 may not last long enough to do everything in one go.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2109 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2110 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will start at the first phrase line and search the phrase |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2111 globally in the whole document. At each match it will stop, compute the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2112 replacement string and offer you the following choices@footnote{Windows |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2113 users: Restrict yourself to the described keys during indexing. Pressing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2114 @key{Help} at the indexing prompt can apparently hang Emacs.}:@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2115 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2116 @table @kbd |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2117 @item y |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2118 Replace this match with the proposed string. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2119 @item n |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2120 Skip this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2121 @item ! |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2122 Replace this and all further matches in this file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2123 @item q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2124 Skip this match, start with next file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2125 @item Q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2126 Skip this match, start with next phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2127 @item o |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2128 Select a different indexing macro for this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2129 @item 1-9 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2130 Select one of multiple index keys (those separated with @samp{||}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2131 @item e |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2132 Edit the replacement text. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2133 @item C-r |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2134 Recursive edit. Use @kbd{M-C-c} to return to the indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2135 @item s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2136 Save this buffer and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2137 @item S |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2138 Save all document buffers and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2139 @item C-g |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2140 Abort the indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2141 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2142 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2143 The @samp{Find and Index in Document} menu in the phrases buffer also |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2144 lists a few options for the indexing process. The options have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2145 associated customization variables to set the defaults (@pxref{Options |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2146 (Index Support)}). Here is a short explanation of what the options do: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2147 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2148 @table @i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2149 @item Match Whole Words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2150 When searching for index phrases, make sure whole words are matched. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2151 This should probably always be on. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2152 @item Case Sensitive Search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2153 Search case sensitively for phrases. I recommend to have this setting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2154 off, in order to match the capitalized words at the beginning of a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2155 sentence, and even typos. You can always say @emph{no} at a match you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2156 do not like. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2157 @item Wrap Long Lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2158 Inserting index macros increases the line length. Turn this option on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2159 to allow @b{Ref@TeX{}} to wrap long lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2160 @item Skip Indexed Matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2161 When this is on, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will at each match try to figure out if |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2162 this match is already indexed. A match is considered indexed if it is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2163 either the argument of an index macro, or if an index macro is directly |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2164 (without whitespace separation) before or after the match. Index macros |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2165 are those configured in @code{reftex-index-macros}. Intended for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2166 re-indexing a documents after changes have been made.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2167 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2168 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2169 Even though indexing should be the last thing you do to a document, you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2170 are bound to make changes afterwards. Indexing then has to be applied |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2171 to the changed regions. The command |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2172 @code{reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region} is designed for this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2173 purpose. When called from a LaTeX document with active region, it will |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2174 apply @code{reftex-index-all-phrases} to the current region.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2175 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2176 @node Displaying and Editing the Index, Builtin Index Macros, The Index Phrases File, Index Support |
25829 | 2177 @section Displaying and Editing the Index |
2178 @cindex Displaying the Index | |
2179 @cindex Editing the Index | |
2180 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
2181 @cindex Index, displaying | |
2182 @cindex Index, editing | |
2183 @kindex C-c > | |
2184 @findex reftex-display-index | |
2185 | |
2186 In order to compile and display the index, press @kbd{C-c >}. If the | |
2187 document uses multiple indices, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask you to select | |
2188 one. Then, all index entries will be sorted alphabetically and | |
2189 displayed in a special buffer, the @file{*Index*} buffer. From that | |
2190 buffer you can check and edit each entry.@refill | |
2191 | |
2192 The index can be restricted to the current section or the region. Then | |
2193 only entries in that part of the document will go into the compiled | |
2194 index. To restrict to the current section, use a numeric prefix | |
2195 @samp{2}, thus press @kbd{C-u 2 C-c >}. To restrict to the current | |
2196 region, make the region active and use a numeric prefix @samp{3} (press | |
2197 @kbd{C-u 3 C-c >}). From within the @file{*Index*} buffer the | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2198 restriction can be moved from one section to the next by pressing the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2199 @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} keys.@refill |
25829 | 2200 |
2201 One caveat: @b{Ref@TeX{}} finds the definition point of an index entry | |
2202 by searching near the buffer position where it had found to macro during | |
2203 scanning. If you have several identical index entries in the same | |
2204 buffer and significant changes have shifted the entries around, you must | |
2205 rescan the buffer to ensure the correspondence between the | |
2206 @file{*Index*} buffer and the definition locations. It is therefore | |
2207 advisable to rescan the document (with @kbd{r} or @kbd{C-u r}) | |
2208 frequently while editing the index from the @file{*Index*} | |
2209 buffer.@refill | |
2210 | |
2211 @kindex ? | |
2212 Here is a list of special commands available in the @file{*Index*} buffer. A | |
2213 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
2214 @kbd{?}.@refill | |
2215 | |
2216 @table @kbd | |
2217 @tablesubheading{General} | |
2218 @item ? | |
2219 Display a summary of commands. | |
2220 | |
2221 @item 0-9, - | |
2222 Prefix argument. | |
2223 | |
2224 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
2225 @item ! A..Z | |
2226 Pressing any capital letter will jump to the corresponding section in | |
2227 the @file{*Index*} buffer. The exclamation mark is special and jumps to | |
2228 the first entries alphabetically sorted below @samp{A}. These are | |
2229 usually non-alphanumeric characters.@refill | |
2230 @item n | |
2231 Go to next entry.@refill | |
2232 @item p | |
2233 Go to previous entry.@refill | |
2234 | |
2235 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} | |
2236 @item @key{SPC} | |
2237 Show the place in the document where this index entry is defined.@refill | |
2238 | |
2239 @item @key{TAB} | |
2240 Go to the definition of the current index entry in another | |
2241 window.@refill | |
2242 | |
2243 @item @key{RET} | |
2244 Go to the definition of the current index entry and hide the | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2245 @file{*Index*} buffer window.@refill |
25829 | 2246 |
2247 @item f | |
2248 @vindex reftex-index-follow-mode | |
2249 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
2250 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
2251 always show the location corresponding to the line in the @file{*Index*} | |
2252 buffer at point. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
2253 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
2254 @code{reftex-index-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files | |
2255 already visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for | |
2256 follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
2257 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
2258 | |
2259 @tablesubheading{Entry editing} | |
2260 @item e | |
2261 Edit the current index entry. In the minibuffer, you can edit the | |
2262 index macro which defines this entry.@refill | |
2263 | |
2264 @item C-k | |
2265 Kill the index entry. Currently not implemented because I don't know | |
2266 how to implement an @code{undo} function for this.@refill | |
2267 | |
2268 @item * | |
2269 Edit the @var{key} part of the entry. This is the initial part of the | |
2270 entry which determines the location of the entry in the index.@refill | |
2271 | |
2272 @item | | |
2273 Edit the @var{attribute} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2274 vertical bar. With @code{MakeIndex}, this part is an encapsulating | |
2275 macro. With @code{xindy}, it is called @emph{attribute} and is a | |
2276 property of the index entry that can lead to special formatting. When | |
2277 called with @kbd{C-u} prefix, kill the entire @var{attribute} | |
2278 part.@refill | |
2279 | |
2280 @item @@ | |
2281 Edit the @var{visual} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2282 @samp{@@} which is used by @code{MakeIndex} to change the visual | |
2283 appearance of the entry in the index. When called with @kbd{C-u} | |
2284 prefix, kill the entire @var{visual} part.@refill | |
2285 | |
2286 @item ( | |
2287 Toggle the beginning of page range property @samp{|(} of the | |
2288 entry.@refill | |
2289 | |
2290 @item ) | |
2291 Toggle the end of page range property @samp{|)} of the entry.@refill | |
2292 | |
2293 @item _ | |
2294 Make the current entry a subentry. This command will prompt for the | |
2295 superordinate entry and insert it.@refill | |
2296 | |
2297 @item ^ | |
2298 Remove the highest superordinate entry. If the current entry is a | |
2299 subitem (@samp{aaa!bbb!ccc}), this function moves it up the hierarchy | |
2300 (@samp{bbb!ccc}).@refill | |
2301 | |
2302 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
2303 @item q | |
2304 Hide the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill | |
2305 | |
2306 @item k | |
2307 Kill the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill | |
2308 | |
2309 @item C-c = | |
2310 Switch to the Table of Contents buffer of this document.@refill | |
2311 | |
2312 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
2313 @item c | |
2314 @vindex reftex-index-include-context | |
2315 Toggle the display of short context in the @file{*Index*} buffer. The | |
2316 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
2317 @code{reftex-index-include-context}.@refill | |
2318 | |
2319 @item @} | |
2320 Restrict the index to a single document section. The corresponding | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2321 section number will be displayed in the @code{R<>} indicator in the |
25829 | 2322 mode line and in the header of the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill |
2323 | |
2324 @item @{ | |
2325 Widen the index to contain all entries of the document.@refill | |
2326 | |
2327 @item < | |
2328 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
2329 previous section.@refill | |
2330 | |
2331 @item > | |
2332 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
2333 next section.@refill | |
2334 | |
2335 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
2336 @item g | |
2337 Rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
2338 document. However, it sorts the entries again, so that edited entries | |
2339 will move to the correct position.@refill | |
2340 | |
2341 @item r | |
2342 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2343 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. When | |
2344 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-nil, rescan only the file this | |
2345 location is defined in, not the entire document.@refill | |
2346 | |
2347 @item C-u r | |
2348 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} | |
2349 buffer.@refill | |
2350 | |
2351 @item s | |
2352 Switch to a different index (for documents with multiple | |
2353 indices).@refill | |
2354 @end table | |
2355 | |
2356 | |
2357 @node Builtin Index Macros, Defining Index Macros, Displaying and Editing the Index, Index Support | |
2358 @section Builtin Index Macros | |
2359 @cindex Builtin index macros | |
2360 @cindex Index macros, builtin | |
2361 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2362 @cindex @code{multind}, LaTeX package | |
2363 @cindex @code{index}, LaTeX package | |
2364 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{multind} | |
2365 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{index} | |
2366 | |
2367 @b{Ref@TeX{}} by default recognizes the @code{\index} and | |
2368 @code{\glossary} macros which are defined in the LaTeX core. It has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2369 also builtin support for the re-implementations of @code{\index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2370 in the @file{multind} and @file{index} packages. However, since |
25829 | 2371 the different definitions of the @code{\index} macro are incompatible, |
2372 you will have to explicitly specify the index style used. | |
2373 @xref{Creating Index Entries}, for information on how to do that. | |
2374 | |
2375 @node Defining Index Macros, , Builtin Index Macros, Index Support | |
2376 @section Defining Index Macros | |
2377 @cindex Defining Index Macros | |
2378 @cindex Index macros, defining | |
2379 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2380 | |
2381 When writing a document with an index you will probably define | |
2382 additional macros which make entries into the index. | |
2383 Let's look at an example. | |
2384 | |
2385 @example | |
2386 \newcommand@{\ix@}[1]@{#1\index@{#1@}@} | |
2387 \newcommand@{\nindex@}[1]@{\textit@{#1@}\index[name]@{#1@}@} | |
2388 \newcommand@{\astobj@}[1]@{\index@{Astronomical Objects!#1@}@} | |
2389 @end example | |
2390 | |
2391 The first macro @code{\ix} typesets its argument in the text and places | |
2392 it into the index. The second macro @code{\nindex} typesets its | |
2393 argument in the text and places it into a separate index with the tag | |
2394 @samp{name}@footnote{We are using the syntax of the @file{index} package | |
2395 here.}. The last macro also places its argument into the index, but as | |
2396 subitems under the main index entry @samp{Astronomical Objects}. Here | |
2397 is how to make @b{Ref@TeX{}} recognize and correctly interpret these | |
2398 macros, first with Emacs Lisp. | |
2399 | |
2400 @lisp | |
2401 (setq reftex-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2402 '(("\\ix@{*@}" "idx" ?x "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2403 ("\\nindex@{*@}" "name" ?n "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2404 ("\\astobj@{*@}" "idx" ?o "Astronomical Objects!" nil t))) |
25829 | 2405 @end lisp |
2406 | |
2407 Note that the index tag is @samp{idx} for the main index, and | |
2408 @samp{name} for the name index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} are reserved | |
2409 for the default index and for the glossary. | |
2410 | |
2411 The character arguments @code{?x}, @code{?n}, and @code{?o} are for | |
2412 quick identification of these macros when @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts new | |
2413 index entries with @code{reftex-index}. These codes need to be | |
2414 unique. @code{?i}, @code{?I}, and @code{?g} are reserved for the | |
2415 @code{\index}, @code{\index*}, and @code{\glossary} macros, | |
2416 respectively. | |
2417 | |
2418 The following string is empty unless your macro adds a superordinate | |
2419 entry to the index key - this is the case for the @code{\astobj} macro. | |
2420 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2421 The next entry can be a hook function to exclude certain matches, it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2422 almost always can be @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2423 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2424 The final element in the list indicates if the text being indexed needs |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2425 to be repeated outside the macro. For the normal index macros, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2426 should be @code{t}. Only if the macro typesets the entry in the text |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2427 (like @code{\ix} and @code{\nindex} in the example do), this should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2428 @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2429 |
25829 | 2430 To do the same thing with customize, you need to fill in the templates |
2431 like this: | |
2432 | |
2433 @example | |
2434 Repeat: | |
2435 [INS] [DEL] List: | |
2436 Macro with args: \ix@{*@} | |
2437 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2438 Access Key : x | |
2439 Key Prefix : | |
2440 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2441 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2442 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2443 Macro with args: \nindex@{*@} | |
2444 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: name | |
2445 Access Key : n | |
2446 Key Prefix : | |
2447 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2448 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2449 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2450 Macro with args: \astobj@{*@} | |
2451 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2452 Access Key : o | |
2453 Key Prefix : Astronomical Objects! | |
2454 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2455 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] on (non-nil) |
25829 | 2456 [INS] |
2457 @end example | |
2458 | |
2459 With the macro @code{\ix} defined, you may want to change the default | |
2460 macro used for indexing a text phrase (@pxref{Creating Index Entries}). | |
2461 This would be done like this | |
2462 | |
2463 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2464 (setq reftex-index-default-macro '(?x "idx")) |
25829 | 2465 @end lisp |
2466 | |
2467 which specifies that the macro identified with the character @code{?x} (the | |
2468 @code{\ix} macro) should be used for indexing phrases and words already | |
2469 in the buffer with @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2470 The index tag is "idx".@refill |
25829 | 2471 |
2472 @node Viewing Cross-References, RefTeXs Menu, Index Support, Top | |
2473 @chapter Viewing Cross--References | |
2474 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
2475 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
2476 @kindex C-c & | |
2477 @kindex S-mouse-2 | |
2478 | |
2479 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display cross--referencing information. This means, | |
2480 if two document locations are linked, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display the | |
2481 matching location(s) in another window. The @code{\label} and @code{\ref} | |
2482 macros are one way of establishing such a link. Also, a @code{\cite} | |
2483 macro is linked to the corresponding @code{\bibitem} macro or a BibTeX | |
2484 database entry.@refill | |
2485 | |
2486 The feature is invoked by pressing @kbd{C-c &} | |
2487 (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) while point is on the @var{key} argument | |
2488 of a macro involved in cross--referencing. You can also click with | |
2489 @kbd{S-mouse-2} on the macro argument. Here is what will happen for | |
2490 individual classes of macros:@refill | |
2491 | |
2492 @table @asis | |
2493 | |
2494 @item @code{\ref} | |
2495 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
2496 Display the corresponding label definition. All usual | |
2497 variants@footnote{all macros that start with @samp{ref} or end with | |
2498 @samp{ref} or @samp{refrange}} of the @code{\ref} macro are active for | |
2499 cross--reference display. This works also for labels defined in an | |
2500 external document when the current document refers to them through the | |
2501 @code{xr} interface (@pxref{xr (LaTeX package)}).@refill | |
2502 | |
2503 @item @code{\label} | |
2504 @cindex @code{\label} | |
2505 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
2506 Display a document location which references this label. Pressing | |
2507 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
2508 all locations. Not only the @code{\label} macro but also other macros | |
2509 with label arguments (as configured with @code{reftex-label-alist}) are | |
2510 active for cross--reference display.@refill | |
2511 | |
2512 @item @code{\cite} | |
2513 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
2514 Display the corresponding BibTeX database entry or @code{\bibitem}. | |
2515 All usual variants@footnote{all macros that either start or end with | |
2516 @samp{cite}} of the @code{\cite} macro are active for cross--reference | |
2517 display.@refill | |
2518 | |
2519 @item @code{\bibitem} | |
2520 @cindex @code{\bibitem} | |
2521 Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing | |
2522 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
2523 all locations.@refill | |
2524 | |
2525 @item BibTeX | |
2526 @cindex BibTeX buffer, viewing cite locations from | |
2527 @cindex Viewing cite locations from BibTeX buffer | |
2528 @kbd{C-c &} is also active in BibTeX buffers. All locations in a | |
2529 document where the database entry at point is cited will be displayed. | |
2530 On first use, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a buffer which belongs to | |
2531 the document you want to search. Subsequent calls will use the same | |
2532 document, until you break this link with a prefix argument to @kbd{C-c | |
2533 &}.@refill | |
2534 | |
2535 @item @code{\index} | |
2536 @cindex @code{\index} | |
2537 Display other locations in the document which are marked by an index | |
2538 macro with the same key argument. Along with the standard @code{\index} | |
2539 and @code{\glossary} macros, all macros configured in | |
2540 @code{reftex-index-macros} will be recognized.@refill | |
2541 @end table | |
2542 | |
2543 @vindex reftex-view-crossref-macros | |
2544 While the display of cross referencing information for the above | |
2545 mentioned macros is hard--coded, you can configure additional relations | |
2546 in the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-macros}. | |
2547 | |
2548 @iftex | |
2549 @chapter All the Rest | |
2550 @end iftex | |
2551 | |
2552 @node RefTeXs Menu, Keybindings, Viewing Cross-References, Top | |
2553 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s Menu | |
2554 @cindex RefTeXs Menu | |
2555 @cindex Menu, in the menu bar | |
2556 | |
2557 @b{Ref@TeX{}} installs a @code{Ref} menu in the menu bar on systems | |
2558 which support this. From this menu you can access all of | |
2559 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands and a few of its options. There is also a | |
2560 @code{Customize} submenu which can be used to access @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
2561 entire set of options.@refill | |
2562 | |
2563 @node Keybindings, Faces, RefTeXs Menu, Top | |
2564 @section Default Keybindings | |
2565 @cindex Keybindings, summary | |
2566 | |
2567 Here is a summary of the available keybindings. | |
2568 | |
2569 @kindex C-c = | |
2570 @kindex C-c ( | |
2571 @kindex C-c ) | |
2572 @kindex C-c [ | |
2573 @kindex C-c & | |
2574 @kindex S-mouse-2 | |
2575 @kindex C-c / | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2576 @kindex C-c \ |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2577 @kindex C-c | |
25829 | 2578 @kindex C-c < |
2579 @kindex C-c > | |
2580 @example | |
2581 @kbd{C-c =} @code{reftex-toc} | |
2582 @kbd{C-c (} @code{reftex-label} | |
2583 @kbd{C-c )} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2584 @kbd{C-c [} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2585 @kbd{C-c &} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
2586 @kbd{S-mouse-2} @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} | |
2587 @kbd{C-c /} @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2588 @kbd{C-c \} @code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2589 @kbd{C-c |} @code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer} |
25829 | 2590 @kbd{C-c <} @code{reftex-index} |
2591 @kbd{C-c >} @code{reftex-display-index} | |
2592 @end example | |
2593 | |
2594 Note that the @kbd{S-mouse-2} binding is only provided if this key is | |
2595 not already used by some other package. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not override an | |
2596 existing binding to @kbd{S-mouse-2}.@refill | |
2597 | |
2598 Personally, I also bind some functions in the users @kbd{C-c} map for | |
2599 easier access.@refill | |
2600 | |
2601 @c FIXME: Do we need bindings for the Index macros here as well? | |
2602 @c C-c i C-c I or so???? | |
2603 @c How about keybindings for reftex-reset-mode and reftex-parse-document? | |
2604 @kindex C-c t | |
2605 @kindex C-c l | |
2606 @kindex C-c r | |
2607 @kindex C-c c | |
2608 @kindex C-c v | |
2609 @kindex C-c s | |
2610 @kindex C-c g | |
2611 @example | |
2612 @kbd{C-c t} @code{reftex-toc} | |
2613 @kbd{C-c l} @code{reftex-label} | |
2614 @kbd{C-c r} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2615 @kbd{C-c c} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2616 @kbd{C-c v} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
2617 @kbd{C-c s} @code{reftex-search-document} | |
2618 @kbd{C-c g} @code{reftex-grep-document} | |
2619 @end example | |
2620 | |
2621 @noindent These keys are reserved for the user, so I cannot bind them by | |
2622 default. If you want to have these keybindings available, set in your | |
2623 @file{.emacs} file: | |
2624 | |
2625 @vindex reftex-extra-bindings | |
2626 @lisp | |
2627 (setq reftex-extra-bindings t) | |
2628 @end lisp | |
2629 | |
2630 @vindex reftex-load-hook | |
2631 Changing and adding to @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s keybindings is best done in the hook | |
2632 @code{reftex-load-hook}. For information on the keymaps | |
2633 which should be used to add keys, see @ref{Keymaps and Hooks}. | |
2634 | |
2635 @node Faces, AUCTeX, Keybindings, Top | |
2636 @section Faces | |
2637 @cindex Faces | |
2638 | |
2639 @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses faces when available to structure the selection and | |
2640 table of contents buffers. It does not create its own faces, but uses | |
2641 the ones defined in @file{font-lock.el}. Therefore, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
2642 use faces only when @code{font-lock} is loaded. This seems to be | |
2643 reasonable because people who like faces will very likely have it | |
2644 loaded. If you wish to turn off fontification or change the involved | |
2645 faces, see @ref{Options (Fontification)}.@refill | |
2646 | |
2647 @node Multifile Documents, Language Support, AUCTeX, Top | |
2648 @section Multifile Documents | |
2649 @cindex Multifile documents | |
2650 @cindex Documents, spread over files | |
2651 | |
2652 The following is relevant when working with documents spread over many | |
2653 files:@refill | |
2654 | |
2655 @itemize @bullet | |
2656 @item | |
2657 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has full support for multifile documents. You can edit parts of | |
2658 several (multifile) documents at the same time without conflicts. | |
2659 @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides functions to run @code{grep}, @code{search} and | |
2660 @code{query-replace} on all files which are part of a multifile | |
2661 document.@refill | |
2662 | |
2663 @item | |
2664 @vindex tex-main-file | |
2665 @vindex TeX-master | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2666 All files belonging to a multifile document should define a File |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2667 Variable (@code{TeX-master} for AUCTeX or @code{tex-main-file} for the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2668 standard Emacs LaTeX mode) containing the name of the master file. For |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2669 example, to set the file variable @code{TeX-master}, include something |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2670 like the following at the end of each TeX file:@refill |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2671 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2672 @example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2673 %%% Local Variables: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2674 %%% mode:latex *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2675 %%% TeX-master: "thesis.tex" *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2676 %%% End: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2677 @end example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2678 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2679 AUCTeX with the setting |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2680 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2681 @lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2682 (setq-default TeX-master nil) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2683 @end lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2684 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2685 will actually ask you for each new file about the master file and insert |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2686 this comment automatically. For more details see the documentation of |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2687 the AUCTeX (@pxref{Multifile,,,auctex, The AUC TeX User Manual}), the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2688 documentation about the Emacs (La)TeX mode (@pxref{TeX Print,,,emacs, |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2689 The GNU Emacs Manual}) and the Emacs documentation on File Variables |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2690 (@pxref{File Variables,,,emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).@refill |
25829 | 2691 |
2692 @item | |
2693 The context of a label definition must be found in the same file as the | |
2694 label itself in order to be processed correctly by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The only | |
2695 exception is that section labels referring to a section statement | |
2696 outside the current file can still use that section title as | |
2697 context.@refill | |
2698 @end itemize | |
2699 | |
2700 @node Language Support, Finding Files, Multifile Documents, Top | |
2701 @section Language Support | |
2702 @cindex Language support | |
2703 | |
2704 Some parts of @b{Ref@TeX{}} are language dependent. The default | |
2705 settings work well for English. If you are writing in a different | |
2706 language, the following hints may be useful: | |
2707 | |
2708 @itemize @bullet | |
2709 @item | |
2710 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
2711 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
2712 The mechanism to derive a label from context includes the abbreviation | |
2713 of words and omission of unimportant words. These mechanisms may have | |
2714 to be changed for other languages. See the variables | |
2715 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} and @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}. | |
2716 | |
2717 @item | |
2718 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
2719 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
2720 Also, when a label is derived from context, @b{Ref@TeX{}} clears the | |
2721 context string from non-ASCII characters in order to make a legal label. | |
2722 If there should ever be a version of @TeX{} which allows extended | |
2723 characters @emph{in labels}, then we will have to look at the | |
2724 variables @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function} and | |
2725 @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}. | |
2726 | |
2727 @item | |
2728 When a label is referenced, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the word before point | |
2729 to guess which label type is required. These @emph{magic words} are | |
2730 different in every language. For an example of how to add magic words, | |
2731 see @ref{Adding Magic Words}. | |
2732 | |
2733 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
2734 @vindex reftex-cite-punctuation | |
2735 @item | |
2736 @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts ``punctuation'' for multiple references and | |
2737 for the author list in citations. Some of this may be language | |
2738 dependent. See the variables @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation} and | |
2739 @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
2740 @end itemize | |
2741 | |
2742 @node Finding Files, Optimizations, Language Support, Top | |
2743 @section Finding Files | |
2744 @cindex Finding files | |
2745 | |
2746 In order to find files included in a document via @code{\input} or | |
2747 @code{\include}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches all directories specified in the | |
2748 environment variable @code{TEXINPUTS}. Similarly, it will search the | |
2749 path specified in the variables @code{BIBINPUTS} and @code{TEXBIB} for | |
2750 BibTeX database files. | |
2751 | |
2752 When searching, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will also expand recursive path | |
2753 definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will | |
2754 only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these | |
2755 variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: | |
2756 | |
2757 @itemize @bullet | |
2758 @item | |
2759 Most TeX system have a default search path for both TeX files and BibTeX | |
2760 files which is defined in some setup file. Usually this default path is | |
2761 for system files which @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not need to see. But if your | |
2762 document needs TeX files or BibTeX database files in a directory only | |
2763 given in the default search path, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will fail to find them. | |
2764 @item | |
2765 Some TeX systems do not use environment variables at all in order to | |
2766 specify the search path. Both default and user search path are then | |
2767 defined in setup files. | |
2768 @end itemize | |
2769 | |
2770 @noindent | |
2771 There are three ways to solve this problem: | |
2772 | |
2773 @itemize @bullet | |
2774 @item | |
2775 Specify all relevant directories explicitly in the environment | |
2776 variables. If for some reason you don't want to mess with the default | |
2777 variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS}, define your own | |
2778 variables and configure @b{Ref@TeX{}} to use them instead: | |
2779 | |
2780 @lisp | |
2781 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables '("MYTEXINPUTS")) | |
2782 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables '("MYBIBINPUTS")) | |
2783 @end lisp | |
2784 | |
2785 @item | |
2786 Specify the full search path directly in @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s variables. | |
2787 | |
2788 @lisp | |
2789 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
2790 '("./inp:/home/cd/tex//:/usr/local/tex//")) | |
2791 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
2792 '("/home/cd/tex/lit/")) | |
2793 @end lisp | |
2794 | |
2795 @item | |
2796 Some TeX systems provide stand--alone programs to do the file search just | |
2797 like TeX and BibTeX. E.g. Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the | |
2798 @code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich} | |
2799 to search for files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to use this | |
2800 program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich} | |
2801 command depends upon the version of that program. | |
2802 | |
2803 @lisp | |
2804 (setq reftex-use-external-file-finders t) | |
2805 (setq reftex-external-file-finders | |
2806 '(("tex" "kpsewhich -format=.tex %f") | |
2807 ("bib" "kpsewhich -format=.bib %f"))) | |
2808 @end lisp | |
2809 @end itemize | |
2810 | |
2811 @node Optimizations, Problems and Work-Arounds, Finding Files, Top | |
2812 @section Optimizations | |
2813 @cindex Optimizations | |
2814 | |
2815 Implementing the principle of least surprises, the default settings of | |
2816 @b{Ref@TeX{}} ensure a safe ride for beginners and casual users. However, | |
2817 when using @b{Ref@TeX{}} for a large project and/or on a small computer, | |
2818 there are ways to improve speed or memory usage.@refill | |
2819 | |
2820 @itemize @bullet | |
2821 @item | |
2822 @b{Removing Lookup Buffers}@* | |
2823 @cindex Removing lookup buffers | |
2824 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load other parts of a multifile document as well as BibTeX | |
2825 database files for lookup purposes. These buffers are kept, so that | |
2826 subsequent use of the same files is fast. If you can't afford keeping | |
2827 these buffers around, and if you can live with a speed penalty, try | |
2828 | |
2829 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
2830 @lisp | |
2831 (setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers nil) | |
2832 @end lisp | |
2833 | |
2834 @item | |
2835 @b{Partial Document Scans}@* | |
2836 @cindex Partial documents scans | |
2837 @cindex Document scanning, partial | |
2838 A @kbd{C-u} prefix on the major @b{Ref@TeX{}} commands @code{reftex-label} | |
2839 (@kbd{C-u C-c (}), @code{reftex-reference} (@kbd{C-u C-c )}), | |
2840 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-u C-c [}), @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-u C-c | |
2841 =}), and @code{reftex-view-crossref} (@kbd{C-u C-c &}) initiates | |
2842 re-parsing of the entire document in order to update the parsing | |
2843 information. For a large document this can be unnecessary, in | |
2844 particular if only one file has changed. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured | |
2845 to do partial scans instead of full ones. @kbd{C-u} re-parsing then | |
2846 does apply only to the current buffer and files included from it. | |
2847 Likewise, the @kbd{r} key in both the label selection buffer and the | |
2848 table-of-contents buffer will only prompt scanning of the file in which | |
2849 the label or section macro near the cursor was defined. Re-parsing of | |
2850 the entire document is still available by using @kbd{C-u C-u} as a | |
2851 prefix, or the capital @kbd{R} key in the menus. To use this feature, | |
2852 try@refill | |
2853 | |
2854 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2855 @lisp | |
2856 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
2857 @end lisp | |
2858 | |
2859 @item | |
2860 @b{Saving Parser Information}@* | |
2861 @cindex Saving parser information | |
2862 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
27195 | 2863 @vindex reftex-parse-file-extension |
25829 | 2864 Even with partial scans enabled, @b{Ref@TeX{}} still has to make one full |
2865 scan, when you start working with a document. To avoid this, parsing | |
2866 information can be stored in a file. The file @file{MASTER.rel} is used | |
2867 for storing information about a document with master file | |
2868 @file{MASTER.tex}. It is written automatically when you kill a buffer | |
2869 in @code{reftex-mode} or when you exit Emacs. The information is | |
2870 restored when you begin working with a document in a new editing | |
2871 session. To use this feature, put into @file{.emacs}:@refill | |
2872 | |
2873 @vindex reftex-save-parse-info | |
2874 @lisp | |
2875 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
2876 @end lisp | |
2877 | |
2878 @item | |
2879 @b{Automatic Document Scans}@* | |
2880 @cindex Automatic document scans | |
2881 @cindex Document scanning, automatic | |
2882 At rare occasions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will automatically rescan a part of the | |
2883 document. If this gets into your way, it can be turned off with | |
2884 | |
2885 @vindex reftex-allow-automatic-rescan | |
2886 @lisp | |
2887 (setq reftex-allow-automatic-rescan nil) | |
2888 @end lisp | |
2889 | |
2890 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will then occasionally annotate new labels in the selection | |
2891 buffer, saying that their position in the label list in uncertain. A | |
2892 manual document scan will fix this.@refill | |
2893 | |
2894 @item | |
2895 @b{Multiple Selection Buffers}@* | |
2896 @cindex Multiple selection buffers | |
2897 @cindex Selection buffers, multiple | |
2898 Normally, the selection buffer @file{*RefTeX Select*} is re-created for | |
2899 every selection process. In documents with very many labels this can | |
2900 take several seconds. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides an option to create a | |
2901 separate selection buffer for each label type and to keep this buffer | |
2902 from one selection to the next. These buffers are updated automatically | |
2903 only when a new label has been added in the buffers category with | |
2904 @code{reftex-label}. Updating the buffer takes as long as recreating it | |
2905 - so the time saving is limited to cases where no new labels of that | |
2906 category have been added. To turn on this feature, use@refill | |
2907 | |
2908 @vindex reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
2909 @lisp | |
2910 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
2911 @end lisp | |
2912 | |
2913 @noindent | |
2914 @cindex Selection buffers, updating | |
2915 You can also inhibit the automatic updating entirely. Then the | |
2916 selection buffer will always pop up very fast, but may not contain the | |
2917 most recently defined labels. You can always update the buffer by hand, | |
2918 with the @kbd{g} key. To get this behavior, use instead@refill | |
2919 | |
2920 @vindex reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
2921 @lisp | |
2922 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t | |
2923 reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers nil) | |
2924 @end lisp | |
2925 @end itemize | |
2926 | |
2927 @need 2000 | |
2928 @noindent | |
2929 @b{As a summary}, here are the settings I recommend for heavy use of | |
2930 @b{Ref@TeX{}} with large documents: | |
2931 | |
2932 @lisp | |
2933 @group | |
2934 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t | |
2935 reftex-save-parse-info t | |
2936 reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
2937 @end group | |
2938 @end lisp | |
2939 | |
2940 @page | |
2941 @node AUCTeX, Multifile Documents, Faces, Top | |
2942 @section @w{AUC @TeX{}} | |
2943 @cindex @code{AUCTeX}, Emacs package | |
2944 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{AUCTeX} | |
2945 | |
2946 AUCTeX is without doubt the best major mode for editing TeX and LaTeX | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2947 files with Emacs (@pxref{Top,AUCTeX,,auctex, The AUCTeX User Manual}). |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2948 If AUCTeX is not part of you Emacs distribution, you can get |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2949 it@footnote{XEmacs 21.x users may want to install the corresponding |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2950 XEmacs package.} by ftp from the |
25829 | 2951 @uref{http://www.sunsite.auc.dk/auctex/,AUCTeX distribution site}. |
2952 | |
2953 @menu | |
2954 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
2955 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
2956 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
2957 @end menu | |
2958 | |
2959 @node AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, Style Files, , AUCTeX | |
2960 @subsection The AUC@TeX{}-@b{Ref@TeX{}} Interface | |
2961 | |
2962 @b{Ref@TeX{}} contains code to interface with AUCTeX. When this | |
2963 interface is turned on, both packages will interact closely. Instead of | |
2964 using @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands directly, you can then also use them | |
2965 indirectly as part of the AUCTeX | |
2966 environment@footnote{@b{Ref@TeX{}} 4.0 and AUCTeX 9.10c will be | |
2967 needed for all of this to work. Parts of it work also with earlier | |
2968 versions.}. The interface is turned on with@refill | |
2969 | |
2970 @lisp | |
2971 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
2972 @end lisp | |
2973 | |
2974 If you need finer control about which parts of the interface are used | |
2975 and which not, read the docstring of the variable | |
2976 @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} or customize it with @kbd{M-x | |
2977 customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX @key{RET}}. | |
2978 | |
2979 The following list describes the individual parts of the interface. | |
2980 | |
2981 @itemize @bullet | |
2982 @item | |
2983 @findex reftex-label | |
2984 @vindex LaTeX-label-function, @r{AUCTeX} | |
2985 @kindex C-c C-e | |
2986 @kindex C-c C-s | |
2987 @findex LaTeX-section, @r{AUCTeX} | |
2988 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX} | |
2989 @b{AUCTeX calls @code{reftex-label} to insert labels}@* | |
2990 When a new section is created with @kbd{C-c C-s}, or a new environment | |
2991 is inserted with @kbd{C-c C-e}, AUCTeX normally prompts for a label to | |
2992 go with it. With the interface, @code{reftex-label} is called instead. | |
2993 For example, if you type @kbd{C-c C-e equation @key{RET}}, AUCTeX and | |
2994 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will insert | |
2995 | |
2996 @example | |
2997 \begin@{equation@} | |
2998 \label@{eq:1@} | |
2999 | |
3000 \end@{equation@} | |
3001 @end example | |
3002 | |
3003 @noindent | |
3004 without further prompts. | |
3005 | |
3006 Similarly, when you type @kbd{C-c C-s section @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3007 will offer its default label which is derived from the section title. | |
3008 | |
3009 @item | |
3010 @b{AUCTeX tells @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections}@* | |
3011 When creating a new section with @kbd{C-c C-s}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not | |
3012 have to rescan the buffer in order to see it.@refill | |
3013 | |
3014 @item | |
3015 @findex reftex-arg-label | |
3016 @findex TeX-arg-label, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3017 @findex reftex-arg-ref | |
3018 @findex TeX-arg-ref, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3019 @findex reftex-arg-cite | |
3020 @findex TeX-arg-cite, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3021 @findex reftex-arg-index | |
3022 @findex TeX-arg-index, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3023 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3024 @kindex C-c @key{RET} | |
3025 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} supplies macro arguments}@* When you insert a macro | |
3026 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}, AUCTeX normally prompts for | |
3027 macro arguments. Internally, it uses the functions | |
3028 @code{TeX-arg-label}, @code{TeX-arg-cite}, and @code{TeX-arg-index} to | |
3029 prompt for arguments which are labels, citation keys and index entries. | |
3030 The interface takes over these functions@footnote{@code{fset} is used to | |
3031 do this, which is not reversible. However, @b{Ref@TeX{}} implements the | |
3032 old functionality when you later decide to turn off the interface.} and | |
3033 supplies the macro arguments with @b{Ref@TeX{}'s} mechanisms. For | |
3034 example, when you type @kbd{C-c @key{RET} ref @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3035 will supply its label selection process (@pxref{Referencing | |
3036 Labels}).@refill | |
3037 | |
3038 @item | |
3039 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} tells AUCTeX about new labels, citation-- and index keys}@* | |
3040 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will add all newly created labels to AUCTeX's completion list. | |
3041 @end itemize | |
3042 | |
3043 @node Style Files, Bib-Cite, AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, AUCTeX | |
3044 @subsection Style Files | |
3045 @cindex Style files, AUCTeX | |
3046 @findex TeX-add-style-hook, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3047 Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by AUCTeX in | |
3048 association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3049 commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3050 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in such a style file is useful when the LaTeX style |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3051 defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3052 index. Many style files (e.g. @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3053 distributed with AUCTeX already support @b{Ref@TeX{}} in this |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3054 way.@refill |
25829 | 3055 |
3056 Before calling a @b{Ref@TeX{}} function, the style hook should always | |
3057 test for the availability of the function, so that the style file will | |
3058 also work for people who do not use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @refill | |
3059 | |
3060 Additions made with style files in the way described below remain local | |
3061 to the current document. For example, if one package uses AMSTeX, the | |
3062 style file will make @b{Ref@TeX{}} switch over to @code{\eqref}, but | |
3063 this will not affect other documents.@refill | |
3064 | |
3065 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3066 @findex reftex-add-to-label-alist | |
3067 A style hook may contain calls to | |
3068 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}@footnote{This used to be the | |
3069 function @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} which is still available as an | |
3070 alias for compatibility.} which defines additions to | |
3071 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The argument taken by this function must have | |
3072 the same format as @code{reftex-label-alist}. The @file{amsmath.el} | |
3073 style file of AUCTeX for example contains the following:@refill | |
3074 | |
3075 @lisp | |
3076 @group | |
3077 (TeX-add-style-hook "amsmath" | |
3078 (lambda () | |
3079 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3080 (reftex-add-label-environments '(AMSTeX))))) | |
3081 @end group | |
3082 @end lisp | |
3083 | |
3084 @noindent | |
3085 @findex LaTeX-add-environments, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3086 while a package @code{myprop} defining a @code{proposition} environment | |
3087 with @code{\newtheorem} might use@refill | |
3088 | |
3089 @lisp | |
3090 @group | |
3091 (TeX-add-style-hook "myprop" | |
3092 (lambda () | |
3093 (LaTeX-add-environments '("proposition" LaTeX-env-label)) | |
3094 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3095 (reftex-add-label-environments | |
3096 '(("proposition" ?p "prop:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3097 ("Proposition" "Prop.") -3)))))) |
25829 | 3098 @end group |
3099 @end lisp | |
3100 | |
3101 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3102 Similarly, a style hook may contain a call to | |
3103 @code{reftex-set-cite-format} to set the citation format. The style | |
3104 file @file{natbib.el} for the Natbib citation style does switch | |
3105 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s citation format like this:@refill | |
3106 | |
3107 @lisp | |
3108 (TeX-add-style-hook "natbib" | |
3109 (lambda () | |
3110 (if (fboundp 'reftex-set-cite-format) | |
3111 (reftex-set-cite-format 'natbib)))) | |
3112 @end lisp | |
3113 | |
3114 @findex reftex-add-index-macros | |
3115 The hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} to | |
3116 define additional @code{\index}-like macros. The argument must have | |
3117 the same format as @code{reftex-index-macros}. It may be a symbol, to | |
3118 trigger support for one of the builtin index packages. For example, | |
3119 the style @file{multind.el} contains | |
3120 | |
3121 @lisp | |
3122 (TeX-add-style-hook "multind" | |
3123 (lambda () | |
3124 (and (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3125 (reftex-add-index-macros '(multind))))) | |
3126 @end lisp | |
3127 | |
3128 If you have your own package @file{myindex} which defines the | |
3129 following macros to be used with the LaTeX @file{index.sty} file | |
3130 @example | |
3131 \newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}@} | |
3132 \newcommand@{\aindex@}[1]@{#1\index[author]@{#1@} | |
3133 @end example | |
3134 | |
3135 you could write this in the style file @file{myindex.el}: | |
3136 | |
3137 @lisp | |
3138 (TeX-add-style-hook "myindex" | |
3139 (lambda () | |
3140 (TeX-add-symbols | |
3141 '("molec" TeX-arg-index) | |
3142 '("aindex" TeX-arg-index)) | |
3143 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3144 (reftex-add-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3145 '(("molec@{*@}" "idx" ?m "Molecules!" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3146 ("aindex@{*@}" "author" ?a "" nil nil)))))) |
25829 | 3147 @end lisp |
3148 | |
3149 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3150 Finally the hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-section-levels} | |
3151 to define additional section statements. For example, the FoilTeX class | |
3152 has just two headers, @code{\foilhead} and @code{\rotatefoilhead}. Here | |
3153 is a style file @file{foils.el} that will inform @b{Ref@TeX{}} about these: | |
3154 | |
3155 @lisp | |
3156 (TeX-add-style-hook "foils" | |
3157 (lambda () | |
3158 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-section-levels) | |
3159 (reftex-add-section-levels '(("foilhead" . 3) | |
3160 ("rotatefoilhead" . 3)))))) | |
3161 @end lisp | |
3162 | |
3163 @node Bib-Cite, , Style Files, AUCTeX | |
3164 @subsection Bib-Cite | |
3165 @cindex @code{bib-cite}, Emacs package | |
3166 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{bib-cite} | |
3167 | |
3168 Once you have written a document with labels, references and citations, | |
3169 it can be nice to read it like a hypertext document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3170 support for that: @code{reftex-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{C-c |
25829 | 3171 &}), @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{S-mouse-2}), and |
3172 @code{reftex-search-document}. A somewhat fancier interface with mouse | |
3173 highlighting is provided (among other things) by Peter S. Galbraith's | |
3174 @file{bib-cite.el}. There is some overlap in the functionalities of | |
3175 Bib-cite and @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Bib-cite.el comes bundled with | |
3176 AUCTeX.@refill | |
3177 | |
3178 Bib-cite version 3.06 and later can be configured so that bib-cite's | |
3179 mouse functions use @b{Ref@TeX{}} for displaying references and citations. | |
3180 This can be useful in particular when working with the LaTeX @code{xr} | |
3181 package or with an explicit @code{thebibliography} environment (rather | |
3182 than BibTeX). Bib-cite cannot handle those, but @b{Ref@TeX{}} does. To | |
3183 make use of this feature, try@refill | |
3184 | |
3185 @vindex bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref | |
3186 @lisp | |
3187 (setq bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref t) | |
3188 @end lisp | |
3189 | |
3190 @page | |
3191 @node Problems and Work-Arounds, Imprint, Optimizations, Top | |
3192 @section Problems and Work-arounds | |
3193 @cindex Problems and work-arounds | |
3194 | |
3195 @itemize @bullet | |
3196 @item | |
3197 @b{LaTeX commands}@* | |
3198 @cindex LaTeX commands, not found | |
3199 @code{\input}, @code{\include}, @code{\bibliography} and @code{\section} | |
3200 (etc.) statements have to be first on a line (except for white space).@refill | |
3201 | |
3202 @item | |
3203 @b{Commented regions}@* | |
3204 @cindex Labels, commented out | |
3205 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sees also labels in regions commented out and will refuse to | |
3206 make duplicates of such labels. This is considered to be a feature.@refill | |
3207 | |
3208 @item | |
3209 @b{Wrong section numbers}@* | |
3210 @cindex Section numbers, wrong | |
3211 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
3212 When using partial scans (@code{reftex-enable-partial-scans}), the section | |
3213 numbers in the table of contents may eventually become wrong. A full | |
3214 scan will fix this.@refill | |
3215 | |
3216 @item | |
3217 @b{Local settings}@* | |
3218 @cindex Settings, local | |
3219 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3220 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3221 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3222 The label environment definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist} are | |
3223 global and apply to all documents. If you need to make definitions | |
3224 local to a document, because they would interfere with settings in other | |
3225 documents, you should use AUCTeX and set up style files with calls to | |
3226 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}, @code{reftex-set-cite-format}, | |
3227 @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, and @code{reftex-add-section-levels}. | |
3228 Settings made with these functions remain local to the current | |
3229 document. @xref{AUCTeX}.@refill | |
3230 | |
3231 @item | |
3232 @b{Funny display in selection buffer}@* | |
3233 @cindex @code{x-symbol}, Emacs package | |
3234 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{x-symbol} | |
3235 @cindex @code{isotex}, Emacs package | |
3236 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{isotex} | |
3237 @cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package | |
3238 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt} | |
3239 When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file | |
3240 different from its disk representation (e.g. x-symbol, isotex, | |
3241 iso-cvt) you may find that @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s parsing information sometimes | |
3242 reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited} | |
3243 parts of a multifile document, because @b{Ref@TeX{}} visits these files | |
3244 literally for speed reasons. Then both short context and section | |
3245 headings may look different from what you usually see on your screen. | |
3246 In rare cases @code{reftex-toc} may have problems to jump to an affected | |
3247 section heading. There are three possible ways to deal with | |
3248 this:@refill | |
3249 @itemize @minus | |
3250 @item | |
3251 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
3252 @code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3253 This implies that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load all parts of a multifile | |
3254 document into Emacs (i.e. there won't be any temporary buffers).@refill | |
3255 @item | |
3256 @vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
3257 @code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3258 This means full initialization of temporary buffers. It involves | |
3259 a penalty when the same unvisited file is used for lookup often.@refill | |
3260 @item | |
3261 Set @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers} to a list of hook | |
3262 functions doing a minimal initialization.@refill | |
3263 @end itemize | |
3264 @vindex reftex-refontify-context | |
3265 See also the variable @code{reftex-refontify-context}. | |
3266 | |
3267 @item | |
3268 @b{Labels as arguments to \begin}@* | |
3269 @cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package | |
3270 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf} | |
3271 Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro | |
3272 to specify a label. E.g. Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both | |
3273 @example | |
3274 \step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@} | |
3275 @var{claim} | |
3276 \end@{step+@} | |
3277 @end example | |
3278 | |
3279 @noindent | |
3280 We need to trick @b{Ref@TeX{}} into swallowing this: | |
3281 | |
3282 @lisp | |
3283 @group | |
3284 ;; Configuration for Lamport's pf.sty | |
3285 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3286 '(("\\step@{*@}@{@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 2 ("Step" "St.")) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3287 ("\\begin@{step+@}@{*@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 1000))) |
25829 | 3288 @end group |
3289 @end lisp | |
3290 | |
3291 @noindent | |
3292 The first line is just a normal configuration for a macro. For the | |
3293 @code{step+} environment we actually tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to look for the | |
3294 @emph{macro} @samp{\begin@{step+@}} and interpret the @emph{first} | |
3295 argument (which really is a second argument to the macro @code{\begin}) | |
3296 as a label of type @code{?p}. Argument count for this macro starts only | |
3297 after the @samp{@{step+@}}, also when specifying how to get | |
3298 context.@refill | |
3299 | |
3300 @item | |
3301 @b{Idle timers in XEmacs}@* | |
3302 @cindex Idle timer restart | |
3303 @vindex reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs | |
3304 In XEmacs, idle timer restart does not work reliably after fast | |
3305 keystrokes. Therefore @b{Ref@TeX{}} currently uses the post command | |
3306 hook to start the timer used for automatic crossref information. When | |
3307 this bug gets fixed, a real idle timer can be requested with | |
3308 @lisp | |
3309 (setq reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs t) | |
3310 @end lisp | |
3311 | |
3312 @item | |
3313 @b{Viper mode}@* | |
3314 @cindex Viper mode | |
3315 @cindex Keybindings, problems with Viper mode | |
3316 @findex viper-harness-minor-mode | |
3317 With @i{Viper} mode prior to Vipers version 3.01, you need to protect | |
3318 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s keymaps with@refill | |
3319 | |
3320 @lisp | |
3321 (viper-harness-minor-mode "reftex") | |
3322 @end lisp | |
3323 | |
3324 @end itemize | |
3325 | |
3326 @page | |
3327 @node Imprint, Commands, Problems and Work-Arounds, Top | |
3328 @section Imprint | |
3329 @cindex Imprint | |
3330 @cindex Maintainer | |
3331 @cindex Acknowledgments | |
3332 @cindex Thanks | |
3333 @cindex Bug reports | |
3334 @cindex @code{http}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} home page | |
3335 @cindex @code{ftp}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} site | |
3336 | |
3337 @b{Ref@TeX{}} was written by @i{@value{AUTHOR}} | |
3338 @email{@value{AUTHOR-EMAIL}}, with contributions by @i{Stephen | |
3339 Eglen}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} is currently maintained by @refill | |
3340 | |
3341 @noindent | |
3342 @value{MAINTAINER} @email{@value{MAINTAINER-EMAIL}} | |
3343 | |
3344 If you have questions about @b{Ref@TeX{}}, there are several Usenet | |
3345 groups which have competent readers: @code{comp.emacs}, | |
3346 @code{gnu.emacs.help}, @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.text.tex}. | |
3347 You can also write directly to the maintainer. | |
3348 | |
3349 If you find a bug in @b{Ref@TeX{}} or its documentation, or if you want | |
3350 to contribute code or ideas, please | |
3351 @uref{mailto:@value{MAINTAINER-EMAIL},contact the maintainer}. Remember | |
3352 to provide all necessary information such as version numbers of Emacs | |
3353 and @b{Ref@TeX{}}, and the relevant part of your configuration in | |
3354 @file{.emacs}. When reporting a bug which throws an exception, please | |
3355 include a backtrace if you know how to produce one. | |
3356 | |
3357 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre-installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
3358 It was also bundled and pre-installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
3359 21.x users want to install the corresponding plugin package which is | |
3360 available from the XEmacs @code{ftp} site. See the XEmacs 21.x | |
3361 documentation on package installation for details.@refill | |
3362 | |
3363 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a | |
3364 @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the | |
3365 @uref{http://www.strw.leidenuniv.nl/~dominik/Tools/,maintainers | |
3366 webpage}. Note that the Emacs 19 version supports many but not all | |
3367 features described in this manual.@refill | |
3368 | |
3369 Thanks to the people on the Net who have used @b{Ref@TeX{}} and helped | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3370 developing it with their reports. In particular thanks to @i{Fran |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3371 Burstall, Alastair Burt, Soren Dayton, Stephen Eglen, Karl Eichwalder, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3372 Peter Galbraith, Kai Grossjohann, Frank Harrell, Dieter Kraft, Adrian |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3373 Lanz, Rory Molinari, Stefan Monnier, Laurent Mugnier, Sudeep Kumar |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3374 Palat, Daniel Polani, Robin Socha, Richard Stanton, Allan Strand, Jan |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3375 Vroonhof, Christoph Wedler, Alan Williams}.@refill |
25829 | 3376 |
3377 The @code{view-crossref} feature was inspired by @i{Peter Galbraith's} | |
3378 @file{bib-cite.el}.@refill | |
3379 | |
3380 Finally thanks to @i{Uwe Bolick} who first got me (some years ago) into | |
3381 supporting LaTeX labels and references with an editor (which was | |
3382 MicroEmacs at the time).@refill | |
3383 | |
3384 @node Commands, Options, Imprint, Top | |
3385 @chapter Commands | |
3386 @cindex Commands, list of | |
3387 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3388 Here is a summary of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands which can be executed from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3389 LaTeX files. Command which are executed from the special buffers are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3390 not described here. All commands are available from the @code{Ref} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3391 menu. For keybindings, @pxref{Keybindings}. |
25829 | 3392 |
3393 @deffn Command reftex-toc | |
3394 Show the table of contents for the current document. When called with | |
3395 one ore two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan the document first.@refill | |
3396 @end deffn | |
3397 | |
3398 @deffn Command reftex-label | |
3399 Insert a unique label. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce | |
3400 document rescan first. | |
3401 @end deffn | |
3402 | |
3403 @deffn Command reftex-reference | |
3404 Start a selection process to select a label, and insert a reference to | |
3405 it. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce document rescan first. | |
3406 @end deffn | |
3407 | |
3408 @deffn Command reftex-citation | |
3409 Make a citation using BibTeX database files. After prompting for a regular | |
3410 expression, scans the buffers with BibTeX entries (taken from the | |
3411 @code{\bibliography} command or a @code{thebibliography} environment) | |
3412 and offers the matching entries for selection. The selected entry is | |
3413 formated according to @code{reftex-cite-format} and inserted into the | |
3414 buffer.@refill @* | |
3415 When called with one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, first rescans the | |
3416 document. When called with a numeric prefix, make that many citations. | |
3417 When called with point inside the braces of a @code{\cite} command, it | |
3418 will add another key, ignoring the value of | |
3419 @code{reftex-cite-format}.@refill @* | |
3420 The regular expression uses an expanded syntax: @samp{&&} is interpreted | |
3421 as @code{and}. Thus, @samp{aaaa&&bbb} matches entries which contain | |
3422 both @samp{aaaa} and @samp{bbb}. While entering the regexp, completion | |
3423 on knows citation keys is possible. @samp{=} is a good regular | |
3424 expression to match all entries in all files.@refill | |
3425 @end deffn | |
3426 | |
3427 @deffn Command reftex-index | |
3428 Query for an index macro and insert it along with its arguments. The | |
3429 index macros available are those defined in @code{reftex-index-macro} or | |
3430 by a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, typically from an AUCTeX | |
3431 style file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides completion for the index tag and the | |
3432 index key, and will prompt for other arguments.@refill | |
3433 @end deffn | |
3434 | |
3435 @deffn Command reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
3436 Put current selection or the word near point into the default index | |
3437 macro. This uses the information in @code{reftex-index-default-macro} | |
3438 to make an index entry. The phrase indexed is the current selection or | |
3439 the word near point. When called with one @kbd{C-u} prefix, let the | |
3440 user have a chance to edit the index entry. When called with 2 | |
3441 @kbd{C-u} as prefix, also ask for the index macro and other stuff. When | |
3442 called inside TeX math mode as determined by the @file{texmathp.el} | |
3443 library which is part of AUCTeX, the string is first processed with the | |
3444 @code{reftex-index-math-format}, which see.@refill | |
3445 @end deffn | |
3446 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3447 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3448 Add current selection or the word at point to the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3449 When you are in transient-mark-mode and the region is active, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3450 selection will be used - otherwise the word at point. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3451 You get a chance to edit the entry in the phrases buffer - to save the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3452 buffer and return to the LaTeX document, finish with @kbd{C-c C-c}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3453 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3454 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3455 @deffn Command reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3456 Switch to the phrases buffer, initialize if empty. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3457 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3458 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3459 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3460 Index all index phrases in the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3461 This works exactly like global indexing from the index phrases buffer, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3462 but operation is restricted to the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3463 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3464 |
25829 | 3465 @deffn Command reftex-display-index |
3466 Display a buffer with an index compiled from the current document. | |
3467 When the document has multiple indices, first prompts for the correct one. | |
3468 When index support is turned off, offer to turn it on. | |
3469 With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan document first. | |
3470 With prefix 2, restrict index to current document section. | |
3471 With prefix 3, restrict index to active region.@refill | |
3472 @end deffn | |
3473 | |
3474 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref | |
3475 View cross reference of macro at point. Point must be on the @var{key} | |
3476 argument. Works with the macros @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, | |
3477 @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index} and many derivatives of | |
3478 these. Where it makes sense, subsequent calls show additional | |
3479 locations. See also the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra} and | |
3480 the command @code{reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex}. With one or two | |
3481 @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce rescanning of the document. With argument | |
3482 2, select the window showing the cross reference. | |
3483 @end deffn | |
3484 | |
3485 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex | |
3486 View location in a LaTeX document which cites the BibTeX entry at point. | |
3487 Since BibTeX files can be used by many LaTeX documents, this function | |
3488 prompts upon first use for a buffer in @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. To reset this | |
3489 link to a document, call the function with with a prefix arg. Calling | |
3490 this function several times find successive citation locations. | |
3491 @end deffn | |
3492 | |
3493 @deffn Command reftex-create-tags-file | |
3494 Create TAGS file by running @code{etags} on the current document. The | |
3495 TAGS file is also immediately visited with | |
3496 @code{visit-tags-table}.@refill | |
3497 @end deffn | |
3498 | |
3499 @deffn Command reftex-grep-document | |
3500 Run grep query through all files related to this document. | |
3501 With prefix arg, force to rescan document. | |
3502 No active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3503 @end deffn | |
3504 | |
3505 @deffn Command reftex-search-document | |
3506 Regexp search through all files of the current document. | |
3507 Starts always in the master file. Stops when a match is found. | |
3508 No active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3509 @end deffn | |
3510 | |
3511 @deffn Command reftex-query-replace-document | |
3512 Run a query-replace-regexp of @var{from} with @var{to} over the entire | |
3513 document. With prefix arg, replace only word-delimited matches. No | |
3514 active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3515 @end deffn | |
3516 | |
3517 @deffn Command reftex-change-label | |
3518 Query replace @var{from} with @var{to} in all @code{\label} and | |
3519 @code{\ref} commands. Works on the entire multifile document. No | |
3520 active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3521 @end deffn | |
3522 | |
3523 @deffn Command reftex-renumber-simple-labels | |
3524 Renumber all simple labels in the document to make them sequentially. | |
3525 Simple labels are the ones created by RefTeX, consisting only of the | |
3526 prefix and a number. After the command completes, all these labels will | |
3527 have sequential numbers throughout the document. Any references to the | |
3528 labels will be changed as well. For this, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the | |
3529 arguments of any macros which either start or end with the string | |
3530 @samp{ref}. This command should be used with care, in particular in | |
3531 multifile documents. You should not use it if another document refers | |
3532 to this one with the @code{xr} package.@refill | |
3533 @end deffn | |
3534 | |
3535 @deffn Command reftex-find-duplicate-labels | |
3536 Produce a list of all duplicate labels in the document.@refill | |
3537 @end deffn | |
3538 | |
3539 @deffn Command reftex-customize | |
3540 Run the customize browser on the @b{Ref@TeX{}} group. | |
3541 @end deffn | |
3542 @deffn Command reftex-show-commentary | |
3543 Show the commentary section from @file{reftex.el}. | |
3544 @end deffn | |
3545 @deffn Command reftex-info | |
3546 Run info on the top @b{Ref@TeX{}} node. | |
3547 @end deffn | |
3548 @deffn Command reftex-parse-document | |
3549 Parse the entire document in order to update the parsing information. | |
3550 @end deffn | |
3551 @deffn Command reftex-reset-mode | |
3552 Enforce rebuilding of several internal lists and variables. Also | |
3553 removes the parse file associated with the current document. | |
3554 @end deffn | |
3555 | |
3556 @node Options, Keymaps and Hooks, Commands, Top | |
3557 @chapter Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
3558 @cindex Options, list of | |
3559 | |
3560 Here is a complete list of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration variables. All | |
3561 variables have customize support - so if you are not familiar with Emacs | |
3562 Lisp (and even if you are) you might find it more comfortable to use | |
3563 @code{customize} to look at and change these variables. @kbd{M-x | |
3564 reftex-customize} will get you there.@refill | |
3565 | |
3566 @menu | |
3567 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
3568 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
3569 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
3570 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
3571 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
3572 * Options (Index Support):: | |
3573 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
3574 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
3575 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
3576 * Options (Fontification):: | |
3577 * Options (Misc):: | |
3578 @end menu | |
3579 | |
3580 @node Options (Table of Contents), Options (Defining Label Environments), , Options | |
3581 @section Table of Contents | |
3582 @cindex Options, table of contents | |
3583 @cindex Table of contents, options | |
3584 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3585 @defopt reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3586 The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3587 Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3588 chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3589 changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3590 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3591 |
25829 | 3592 @defopt reftex-toc-keep-other-windows |
3593 Non-@code{nil} means, split the selected window to display the | |
3594 @file{*toc*} buffer. This helps to keep the window configuration, but | |
3595 makes the @file{*toc*} small. When @code{nil}, all other windows except | |
3596 the selected one will be deleted, so that the @file{*toc*} window fills | |
3597 half the frame.@refill | |
3598 @end defopt | |
3599 | |
3600 @defopt reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
3601 Non-@code{nil} means, include file boundaries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3602 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3603 @kbd{i} key.@refill | |
3604 @end defopt | |
3605 | |
3606 @defopt reftex-toc-include-labels | |
3607 Non-@code{nil} means, include labels in @file{*toc*} buffer. This flag | |
3608 can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{l} | |
3609 key.@refill | |
3610 @end defopt | |
3611 | |
3612 @defopt reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
3613 Non-@code{nil} means, include index entries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3614 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3615 @kbd{i} key. | |
3616 @end defopt | |
3617 | |
3618 @defopt reftex-toc-include-context | |
3619 Non-@code{nil} means, include context with labels in the @file{*toc*} | |
3620 buffer. Context will only be shown if the labels are visible as well. | |
3621 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3622 @kbd{c} key.@refill | |
3623 @end defopt | |
3624 | |
3625 @defopt reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
3626 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*toc*} buffer (the | |
3627 table-of-contents buffer) will cause other window to follow. The other | |
3628 window will show the corresponding part of the document. This flag can | |
3629 be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{f} | |
3630 key.@refill | |
3631 @end defopt | |
3632 | |
3633 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-toc-mode-hook | |
3634 Normal hook which is run when a @file{*toc*} buffer is | |
3635 created.@refill | |
3636 @end deffn | |
3637 | |
3638 @deffn Keymap reftex-toc-map | |
3639 The keymap which is active in the @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3640 (@pxref{Table of Contents}).@refill | |
3641 @end deffn | |
3642 | |
3643 @node Options (Defining Label Environments), Options (Creating Labels), Options (Table of Contents), Options | |
3644 @section Defining Label Environments | |
3645 @cindex Options, defining label environments | |
3646 @cindex Defining label environments, options | |
3647 | |
3648 @defopt reftex-default-label-alist-entries | |
3649 Default label alist specifications. It is a list of symbols with | |
3650 associations in the constant @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}. | |
3651 @code{LaTeX} should always be the last entry.@refill | |
3652 @end defopt | |
3653 | |
3654 @defopt reftex-label-alist | |
3655 Set this variable to define additions and changes to the defaults in | |
3656 @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. The only things you | |
3657 @emph{must not} change is that @code{?s} is the type indicator for | |
3658 section labels, and @key{SPC} for the @code{any} label type. These are | |
3659 hard-coded at other places in the code.@refill | |
3660 | |
3661 The value of the variable must be a list of items. Each item is a list | |
3662 itself and has the following structure: | |
3663 | |
3664 @example | |
3665 (@var{env-or-macro} @var{type-key} @var{label-prefix} @var{reference-format} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3666 @var{context-method} (@var{magic-word} ... ) @var{toc-level}) |
25829 | 3667 @end example |
3668 | |
3669 Each list entry describes either an environment carrying a counter for | |
3670 use with @code{\label} and @code{\ref}, or a LaTeX macro defining a | |
3671 label as (or inside) one of its arguments. The elements of each list | |
3672 entry are:@refill | |
3673 | |
3674 @table @asis | |
3675 @item @var{env-or-macro} | |
3676 Name of the environment (like @samp{table}) or macro (like | |
3677 @samp{\myfig}). For macros, indicate the arguments, as in | |
3678 @samp{\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}}. Use square brackets for optional | |
3679 arguments, a star to mark the label argument, if any. The macro does | |
3680 not have to have a label argument - you could also use | |
3681 @samp{\label@{...@}} inside one of its arguments.@refill | |
3682 | |
3683 Special names: @code{section} for section labels, @code{any} to define a | |
3684 group which contains all labels.@refill | |
3685 | |
3686 This may also be a function to do local parsing and identify point to be | |
3687 in a a non-standard label environment. The function must take an | |
3688 argument @var{bound} and limit backward searches to this value. It | |
3689 should return either nil or a cons cell @code{(@var{function} | |
3690 . @var{position})} with the function symbol and the position where the | |
3691 special environment starts. See the Info documentation for an | |
3692 example.@refill | |
3693 | |
3694 Finally this may also be @code{nil} if the entry is only meant to change | |
3695 some settings associated with the type indicator character (see | |
3696 below).@refill | |
3697 | |
3698 @item @var{type-key} | |
3699 Type indicator character, like @code{?t}, must be a printable ASCII | |
3700 character. The type indicator is a single character which defines a | |
3701 label type. Any label inside the environment or macro is assumed to | |
3702 belong to this type. The same character may occur several times in this | |
3703 list, to cover cases in which different environments carry the same | |
3704 label type (like @code{equation} and @code{eqnarray}). If the type | |
3705 indicator is @code{nil} and the macro has a label argument @samp{@{*@}}, | |
3706 the macro defines neutral labels just like @code{\label}. In this case | |
3707 the reminder of this entry is ignored.@refill | |
3708 | |
3709 @item @var{label-prefix} | |
3710 Label prefix string, like @samp{tab:}. The prefix is a short string | |
3711 used as the start of a label. It may be the empty string. The prefix | |
3712 may contain the following @samp{%} escapes:@refill | |
3713 | |
3714 @example | |
3715 %f Current file name, directory and extension stripped. | |
3716 %F Current file name relative to master file directory. | |
3717 %u User login name, on systems which support this. | |
3718 %S A section prefix derived with variable @code{reftex-section-prefixes}. | |
3719 @end example | |
3720 | |
3721 @noindent | |
3722 Example: In a file @file{intro.tex}, @samp{eq:%f:} will become | |
3723 @samp{eq:intro:}.@refill | |
3724 | |
3725 @item @var{reference-format} | |
3726 Format string for reference insert in buffer. @samp{%s} will be | |
3727 replaced by the label. When the format starts with @samp{~}, this | |
3728 @samp{~} will only be inserted when the character before point is | |
3729 @emph{not} a whitespace.@refill | |
3730 | |
3731 @item @var{context-method} | |
3732 Indication on how to find the short context. | |
3733 @itemize @minus | |
3734 @item | |
3735 If @code{nil}, use the text following the @samp{\label@{...@}} macro.@refill | |
3736 @item | |
3737 If @code{t}, use | |
3738 @itemize @minus | |
3739 @item | |
3740 the section heading for section labels. | |
3741 @item | |
3742 text following the @samp{\begin@{...@}} statement of environments (not | |
3743 a good choice for environments like eqnarray or enumerate, where one has | |
3744 several labels in a single environment).@refill | |
3745 @item | |
3746 text after the macro name (starting with the first arg) for | |
3747 macros.@refill | |
3748 @end itemize | |
3749 @item | |
3750 If an integer, use the nth argument of the macro. As a special case, | |
3751 1000 means to get text after the last macro argument.@refill | |
3752 @item | |
3753 If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label. | |
3754 Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g. putting | |
3755 this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table | |
3756 environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for | |
3757 eqnarrays.@refill | |
3758 @item | |
3759 If any of @code{caption}, @code{item}, @code{eqnarray-like}, | |
3760 @code{alignat-like}, this symbol will internally be translated into an | |
3761 appropriate regexp (see also the variable | |
3762 @code{reftex-default-context-regexps}).@refill | |
3763 @item | |
3764 If a function, call this function with the name of the environment/macro | |
3765 as argument. On call, point will be just after the @code{\label} macro. | |
3766 The function is expected to return a suitable context string. It should | |
3767 throw an exception (error) when failing to find context. As an example, | |
3768 here is a function returning the 10 chars following the label macro as | |
3769 context:@refill | |
3770 | |
3771 @example | |
3772 (defun my-context-function (env-or-mac) | |
3773 (if (> (point-max) (+ 10 (point))) | |
3774 (buffer-substring (point) (+ 10 (point))) | |
3775 (error "Buffer too small"))) | |
3776 @end example | |
3777 @end itemize | |
3778 | |
3779 Label context is used in two ways by @b{Ref@TeX{}}: For display in the label | |
3780 menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different | |
3781 method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair. | |
3782 E.g. @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for | |
3783 display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label | |
3784 string. This is actually used for section labels.@refill | |
3785 | |
3786 @item @var{magic-word-list} | |
3787 List of magic words which identify a reference to be of this type. If | |
3788 the word before point is equal to one of these words when calling | |
3789 @code{reftex-reference}, the label list offered will be automatically | |
3790 restricted to labels of the correct type. If the first element of this | |
3791 word--list is the symbol `regexp', the strings are interpreted as regular | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3792 expressions.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3793 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3794 @item @var{toc-level} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3795 The integer level at which this environment should be added to the table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3796 of contents. See also @code{reftex-section-levels}. A positive value |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3797 will number the entries mixed with the sectioning commands of the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3798 level. A negative value will make unnumbered entries. Useful only for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3799 theorem-like environments which structure the document. Will be ignored |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3800 for macros. When omitted or @code{nil}, no TOC entries will be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3801 made.@refill |
25829 | 3802 @end table |
3803 | |
3804 If the type indicator characters of two or more entries are the same, | |
3805 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use@refill | |
3806 @itemize @minus | |
3807 @item | |
3808 the first non-@code{nil} format and prefix | |
3809 @item | |
3810 the magic words of all involved entries. | |
3811 @end itemize | |
3812 | |
3813 Any list entry may also be a symbol. If that has an association in | |
3814 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}, the @code{cddr} of that association is | |
3815 spliced into the list. However, builtin defaults should normally be set | |
3816 with the variable @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}.@refill | |
3817 @end defopt | |
3818 | |
3819 @defopt reftex-max-section-depth | |
3820 Maximum depth of section levels in document structure. | |
3821 Standard LaTeX needs 7, default is 12. | |
3822 @end defopt | |
3823 | |
3824 @defopt reftex-section-levels | |
3825 Commands and levels used for defining sections in the document. The | |
3826 @code{car} of each cons cell is the name of the section macro. The | |
3827 @code{cdr} is a number indicating its level. A negative level means the | |
3828 same as the positive value, but the section will never get a | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3829 number. The @code{cdr} may also be a function which then has to return |
25829 | 3830 the level.@refill |
3831 @end defopt | |
3832 | |
3833 @defopt reftex-section-prefixes | |
3834 Prefixes for section labels. When the label prefix given in an entry in | |
3835 @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to | |
3836 determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section | |
3837 level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form | |
3838 @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro | |
3839 names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in | |
3840 @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. | |
3841 @end defopt | |
3842 | |
3843 @defopt reftex-default-context-regexps | |
3844 Alist with default regular expressions for finding context. The emacs | |
3845 lisp form @w{@code{(format regexp (regexp-quote environment))}} is used | |
3846 to calculate the final regular expression - so @samp{%s} will be | |
3847 replaced with the environment or macro.@refill | |
3848 @end defopt | |
3849 | |
3850 @node Options (Creating Labels), Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Defining Label Environments), Options | |
3851 @section Creating Labels | |
3852 @cindex Options, creating labels | |
3853 @cindex Creating labels, options | |
3854 | |
3855 @defopt reftex-insert-label-flags | |
3856 Flags governing label insertion. The value has the form | |
3857 | |
3858 @example | |
3859 (@var{derive} @var{prompt}) | |
3860 @end example | |
3861 | |
3862 If @var{derive}is @code{t}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will try to derive a sensible | |
3863 label from context. A section label for example will be derived from | |
3864 the section heading. The conversion of the context to a legal label is | |
3865 governed by the specifications given in | |
3866 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. If @var{derive} is @code{nil}, | |
3867 the default label will consist of the prefix and a unique number, like | |
3868 @samp{eq:23}.@refill | |
3869 | |
3870 If @var{prompt} is @code{t}, the user will be prompted for a label | |
3871 string. When @var{prompt} is @code{nil}, the default label will be | |
3872 inserted without query.@refill | |
3873 | |
3874 So the combination of @var{derive} and @var{prompt} controls label | |
3875 insertion. Here is a table describing all four possibilities:@refill | |
3876 | |
3877 @example | |
3878 @group | |
3879 @var{derive} @var{prompt} @var{action} | |
3880 ----------------------------------------------------------- | |
3881 nil nil @r{Insert simple label, like @samp{eq:22} or @samp{sec:13}. No query.} | |
3882 nil t @r{Prompt for label.} | |
3883 t nil @r{Derive a label from context and insert. No query.} | |
3884 t t @r{Derive a label from context, prompt for confirmation.} | |
3885 @end group | |
3886 @end example | |
3887 | |
3888 Each flag may be set to @code{t}, @code{nil}, or a string of label type | |
3889 letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. Thus, | |
3890 the combination may be set differently for each label type. The default | |
3891 settings @samp{"s"} and @samp{"sft"} mean: Derive section labels from | |
3892 headings (with confirmation). Prompt for figure and table labels. Use | |
3893 simple labels without confirmation for everything else.@refill | |
3894 | |
3895 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
3896 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
3897 (footnote), @code{N} (endnote) plus any definitions in | |
3898 @code{reftex-label-alist}.@refill | |
3899 @end defopt | |
3900 | |
3901 @deffn Hook reftex-format-label-function | |
3902 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
3903 insert as a label definition. The function will be called with two | |
3904 arguments, the @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually | |
3905 @samp{\label@{%s@}}). It should return the string to insert into the | |
3906 buffer.@refill | |
3907 @end deffn | |
3908 | |
3909 @deffn Hook reftex-string-to-label-function | |
3910 Function to turn an arbitrary string into a legal label. | |
3911 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default function uses the variable | |
3912 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}.@refill | |
3913 @end deffn | |
3914 | |
3915 @deffn Hook reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
3916 Filter function which will process a context string before it is used to | |
3917 derive a label from it. The intended application is to convert ISO or | |
3918 Mule characters into something legal in labels. The default function | |
3919 @code{reftex-latin1-to-ascii} removes the accents from Latin-1 | |
3920 characters. X-Symbol (>=2.6) sets this variable to the much more | |
3921 general @code{x-symbol-translate-to-ascii}.@refill | |
3922 @end deffn | |
3923 | |
3924 @defopt reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
3925 Parameters for converting a string into a label. This variable is a | |
3926 list of the following items:@refill | |
3927 @table @asis | |
3928 @item @var{nwords} | |
3929 Number of words to use. | |
3930 @item @var{maxchar} | |
3931 Maximum number of characters in a label string. | |
3932 @item @var{illegal} | |
3933 @code{nil}: Throw away any words containing characters illegal in labels.@* | |
3934 @code{t}: Throw away only the illegal characters, not the whole word. | |
3935 @item @var{abbrev} | |
3936 @code{nil}: Never abbreviate words.@* | |
3937 @code{t}: Always abbreviate words (see @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}).@* | |
3938 @code{1}: Abbreviate words if necessary to shorten label string. | |
3939 @item @var{separator} | |
3940 String separating different words in the label. | |
3941 @item @var{ignorewords} | |
3942 List of words which should not be part of labels. | |
3943 @item @var{downcase} | |
3944 @code{t}: Downcase words before putting them into the label.@* | |
3945 @end table | |
3946 @end defopt | |
3947 | |
3948 @defopt reftex-label-illegal-re | |
3949 Regexp matching characters not legal in labels. | |
3950 @end defopt | |
3951 | |
3952 @defopt reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
3953 Parameters for abbreviation of words. A list of four parameters.@refill | |
3954 @table @asis | |
3955 @item @var{min-chars} | |
3956 Minimum number of characters remaining after abbreviation. | |
3957 @item @var{min-kill} | |
3958 Minimum number of characters to remove when abbreviating words.@refill | |
3959 @item @var{before} | |
3960 Character class before abbrev point in word.@refill | |
3961 @item @var{after} | |
3962 Character class after abbrev point in word.@refill | |
3963 @end table | |
3964 @end defopt | |
3965 | |
3966 @node Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Creating Citations), Options (Creating Labels), Options | |
3967 @section Referencing Labels | |
3968 @cindex Options, referencing labels | |
3969 @cindex Referencing labels, options | |
3970 | |
3971 @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags | |
3972 List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: | |
3973 @table @asis | |
3974 @item @var{table-of-contents} | |
3975 Show the labels embedded in a table of context.@refill | |
3976 @item @var{section-numbers} | |
3977 Include section numbers (like 4.1.3) in table of contents.@refill | |
3978 @item @var{counters} | |
3979 Show counters. This just numbers the labels in the menu.@refill | |
3980 @item @var{no-context} | |
3981 Non-@code{nil} means do @emph{not} show the short context.@refill | |
3982 @item @var{follow} | |
3983 Follow full context in other window.@refill | |
3984 @item @var{show-commented} | |
3985 Show labels from regions which are commented out.@refill | |
3986 @item @var{match-everywhere} | |
3987 Obsolete flag.@refill | |
3988 @item @var{show-files} | |
3989 Show begin and end of included files.@refill | |
3990 @end table | |
3991 | |
3992 Each of these flags can be set to @code{t} or @code{nil}, or to a string | |
3993 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. | |
3994 These strings work like character classes in regular expressions. Thus, | |
3995 setting one of the flags to @samp{"sf"} makes the flag true for section | |
3996 and figure labels, @code{nil} for everything else. Setting it to | |
3997 @samp{"^sf"} makes it the other way round.@refill | |
3998 | |
3999 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
4000 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
4001 (footnote), plus any definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist}.@refill | |
4002 | |
4003 Most options can also be switched from the label menu itself - so if you | |
4004 decide here to not have a table of contents in the label menu, you can | |
4005 still get one interactively during selection from the label menu.@refill | |
4006 @end defopt | |
4007 | |
4008 @defopt reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
4009 Punctuation strings for multiple references. When marking is used in | |
4010 the selection buffer to select several references, this variable | |
4011 associates the 3 marking characters @samp{,-+} with prefix strings to be | |
4012 inserted into the buffer before the corresponding @code{\ref} macro. | |
4013 This is used to string together whole reference sets, like | |
4014 @samp{eqs. 1,2,3-5,6 and 7} in a single call to | |
4015 @code{reftex-reference}.@refill | |
4016 @end defopt | |
4017 | |
4018 @defopt reftex-vref-is-default | |
4019 Non-@code{nil} means, the varioref macro @code{\vref} is used as | |
4020 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{v} key toggles the reference | |
4021 macro between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref}. The value of this variable | |
4022 determines the default which is active when entering the selection | |
4023 process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be a string | |
4024 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be | |
4025 true.@refill | |
4026 @end defopt | |
4027 | |
4028 @defopt reftex-fref-is-default | |
4029 Non-@code{nil} means, the fancyref macro @code{\fref} is used as | |
4030 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{V} key toggles the reference | |
4031 macro between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The value of | |
4032 this variable determines the default which is active when entering the | |
4033 selection process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be | |
4034 a string of type letters indicating the label types for which it should | |
4035 be true. | |
4036 @end defopt | |
4037 | |
4038 @deffn Hook reftex-format-ref-function | |
4039 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4040 insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be | |
4041 changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the | |
4042 special commands to insert @code{\vref} and @code{\fref} references, so | |
4043 even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the special | |
4044 commands. The function will be called with two arguments, the | |
4045 @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually @samp{~\ref@{%s@}}). | |
4046 It should return the string to insert into the buffer.@refill | |
4047 @end deffn | |
4048 | |
4049 @defopt reftex-level-indent | |
4050 Number of spaces to be used for indentation per section level.@refill | |
4051 @end defopt | |
4052 | |
4053 @defopt reftex-guess-label-type | |
4054 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{reftex-reference} will try to guess the | |
4055 label type. To do that, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will look at the word before the | |
4056 cursor and compare it with the magic words given in | |
4057 @code{reftex-label-alist}. When it finds a match, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
4058 immediately offer the correct label menu - otherwise it will prompt you | |
4059 for a label type. If you set this variable to @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4060 will always prompt for a label type.@refill | |
4061 @end defopt | |
4062 | |
4063 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-display-copied-context-hook | |
4064 Normal Hook which is run before context is displayed anywhere. Designed | |
4065 for @w{@code{X-Symbol}}, but may have other uses as well.@refill | |
4066 @end deffn | |
4067 | |
4068 @deffn Hook reftex-pre-refontification-functions | |
4069 @code{X-Symbol} specific hook. Probably not useful for other purposes. | |
4070 The functions get two arguments, the buffer from where the command | |
4071 started and a symbol indicating in what context the hook is | |
4072 called.@refill | |
4073 @end deffn | |
4074 | |
4075 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-label-mode-hook | |
4076 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
4077 @code{reftex-select-label-mode}.@refill | |
4078 @end deffn | |
4079 | |
4080 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-label-map | |
4081 The keymap which is active in the labels selection process | |
4082 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
4083 @end deffn | |
4084 | |
4085 @node Options (Creating Citations), Options (Index Support), Options (Referencing Labels), Options | |
4086 @section Creating Citations | |
4087 @cindex Options, creating citations | |
4088 @cindex Creating citations, options | |
4089 | |
4090 @defopt reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps | |
4091 List of regular expressions to exclude files in | |
4092 @code{\\bibliography@{..@}}. File names matched by any of these regexps | |
4093 will not be parsed. Intended for files which contain only | |
4094 @code{@@string} macro definitions and the like, which are ignored by | |
4095 @b{Ref@TeX{}} anyway.@refill | |
4096 @end defopt | |
4097 | |
4098 @defopt reftex-default-bibliography | |
4099 List of BibTeX database files which should be used if none are specified. | |
4100 When @code{reftex-citation} is called from a document with neither | |
4101 a @samp{\bibliography@{...@}} statement nor a @code{thebibliography} | |
4102 environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will scan these files instead. Intended for | |
4103 using @code{reftex-citation} in non-LaTeX files. The files will be | |
4104 searched along the BIBINPUTS or TEXBIB path.@refill | |
4105 @end defopt | |
4106 | |
4107 @defopt reftex-sort-bibtex-matches | |
4108 Sorting of the entries found in BibTeX databases by reftex-citation. | |
4109 Possible values:@refill | |
4110 @example | |
4111 nil @r{Do not sort entries.} | |
4112 author @r{Sort entries by author name.} | |
4113 year @r{Sort entries by increasing year.} | |
4114 reverse-year @r{Sort entries by decreasing year.} | |
4115 @end example | |
4116 @end defopt | |
4117 | |
4118 @defopt reftex-cite-format | |
4119 The format of citations to be inserted into the buffer. It can be a | |
4120 string, an alist or a symbol. In the simplest case this is just the string | |
4121 @samp{\cite@{%l@}}, which is also the default. See the definition of | |
4122 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin} for more complex examples.@refill | |
4123 | |
4124 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is a string, it will be used as the format. | |
4125 In the format, the following percent escapes will be expanded.@refill | |
4126 | |
4127 @table @code | |
4128 @item %l | |
4129 The BibTeX label of the citation. | |
4130 @item %a | |
4131 List of author names, see also @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
4132 @item %2a | |
4133 Like %a, but abbreviate more than 2 authors like Jones et al. | |
4134 @item %A | |
4135 First author name only. | |
4136 @item %e | |
4137 Works like @samp{%a}, but on list of editor names. (@samp{%2e} and | |
4138 @samp{%E} work a well).@refill | |
4139 @end table | |
4140 | |
4141 It is also possible to access all other BibTeX database fields: | |
4142 | |
4143 @example | |
4144 %b booktitle %c chapter %d edition %h howpublished | |
4145 %i institution %j journal %k key %m month | |
4146 %n number %o organization %p pages %P first page | |
4147 %r address %s school %u publisher %t title | |
4148 %v volume %y year | |
4149 %B booktitle, abbreviated %T title, abbreviated | |
4150 @end example | |
4151 | |
4152 @noindent | |
4153 Usually, only @samp{%l} is needed. The other stuff is mainly for the | |
4154 echo area display, and for @code{(setq reftex-comment-citations t)}.@refill | |
4155 | |
4156 @samp{%<} as a special operator kills punctuation and space around it | |
4157 after the string has been formatted.@refill | |
4158 | |
4159 Beware that all this only works with BibTeX database files. When | |
4160 citations are made from the @code{\bibitems} in an explicit | |
4161 @code{thebibliography} environment, only @samp{%l} is available.@refill | |
4162 | |
4163 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is an alist of characters and strings, the | |
4164 user will be prompted for a character to select one of the possible | |
4165 format strings.@refill | |
4166 | |
4167 In order to configure this variable, you can either set | |
4168 @code{reftex-cite-format} directly yourself or set it to the | |
4169 @emph{symbol} of one of the predefined styles. The predefined symbols | |
4170 are those which have an association in the constant | |
4171 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin}) E.g.: @code{(setq reftex-cite-format | |
4172 'natbib)}.@refill | |
4173 @end defopt | |
4174 | |
4175 @deffn Hook reftex-format-cite-function | |
4176 | |
4177 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4178 insert as a citation. Note that the citation format can also be changed | |
4179 with the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. The function will be | |
4180 called with two arguments, the @var{citation-key} and the | |
4181 @var{default-format} (taken from @code{reftex-cite-format}). It should | |
4182 return the string to insert into the buffer.@refill | |
4183 @end deffn | |
4184 | |
4185 @defopt reftex-comment-citations | |
4186 Non-@code{nil} means add a comment for each citation describing the full | |
4187 entry. The comment is formatted according to | |
4188 @code{reftex-cite-comment-format}.@refill | |
4189 @end defopt | |
4190 | |
4191 @defopt reftex-cite-comment-format | |
4192 Citation format used for commented citations. Must @emph{not} contain | |
4193 @samp{%l}. See the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible | |
4194 percent escapes.@refill | |
4195 @end defopt | |
4196 | |
4197 @defopt reftex-cite-punctuation | |
4198 Punctuation for formatting of name lists in citations. This is a list | |
4199 of 3 strings.@refill | |
4200 @enumerate | |
4201 @item | |
4202 normal names separator, like @samp{, } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4203 @item | |
4204 final names separator, like @samp{ and } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4205 @item | |
4206 The @samp{et al.} string, like @samp{ @{\it et al.@}} in | |
4207 Jones @{\it et al.@} | |
4208 @end enumerate | |
4209 @end defopt | |
4210 | |
4211 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-bib-mode-hook | |
4212 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
4213 @code{reftex-select-bib-mode}.@refill | |
4214 @end deffn | |
4215 | |
4216 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-bib-map | |
4217 The keymap which is active in the citation-key selection process | |
4218 (@pxref{Creating Citations}).@refill | |
4219 @end deffn | |
4220 | |
4221 @node Options (Index Support), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Creating Citations), Options | |
4222 @section Index Support | |
4223 @cindex Options, Index support | |
4224 @cindex Index support, options | |
4225 | |
4226 @defopt reftex-support-index | |
4227 Non-@code{nil} means, index entries are parsed as well. Index support | |
4228 is resource intensive and the internal structure holding the parsed | |
4229 information can become quite big. Therefore it can be turned off. When | |
4230 this is @code{nil} and you execute a command which requires index | |
4231 support, you will be asked for confirmation to turn it on and rescan the | |
4232 document.@refill | |
4233 @end defopt | |
4234 | |
4235 @defopt reftex-index-special-chars | |
4236 List of special characters in index entries, given as strings. These | |
4237 correspond to the @code{MakeIndex} keywords | |
4238 @code{(@var{level} @var{encap} @var{actual} @var{quote} @var{escape})}. | |
4239 @end defopt | |
4240 | |
4241 @defopt reftex-index-macros | |
4242 List of macros which define index entries. The structure of each entry | |
4243 is | |
4244 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4245 (@var{macro} @var{index-tag} @var{key} @var{prefix} @var{exclude} @var{repeat}) |
25829 | 4246 @end lisp |
4247 | |
4248 @var{macro} is the macro. Arguments should be denoted by empty braces, | |
4249 as for example in @samp{\index[]@{*@}}. Use square brackets to denote | |
4250 optional arguments. The star marks where the index key is.@refill | |
4251 | |
4252 @var{index-tag} is a short name of the index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} | |
4253 are reserved for the default index and the glossary. Other indices can | |
4254 be defined as well. If this is an integer, the Nth argument of the | |
4255 macro holds the index tag.@refill | |
4256 | |
4257 @var{key} is a character which is used to identify the macro for input | |
4258 with @code{reftex-index}. @samp{?i}, @samp{?I}, and @samp{?g} are | |
4259 reserved for default index and glossary.@refill | |
4260 | |
4261 @var{prefix} can be a prefix which is added to the @var{key} part of the | |
4262 index entry. If you have a macro | |
4263 @code{\newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}}, this prefix | |
4264 should be @samp{Molecules!}.@refill | |
4265 | |
4266 @var{exclude} can be a function. If this function exists and returns a | |
4267 non-nil value, the index entry at point is ignored. This was | |
4268 implemented to support the (deprecated) @samp{^} and @samp{_} shortcuts | |
4269 in the LaTeX2e @code{index} package.@refill | |
4270 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4271 @var{repeat}, if non-@code{nil}, means the index macro does not typeset |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4272 the entry in the text, so that the text has to be repeated outside the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4273 index macro. Needed for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} and for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4274 indexing from the phrase buffer.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4275 |
25829 | 4276 The final entry may also be a symbol. It must have an association in |
4277 the variable @code{reftex-index-macros-builtin} to specify the main | |
4278 indexing package you are using. Legal values are currently@refill | |
4279 @example | |
4280 default @r{The LaTeX default - unnecessary to specify this one} | |
4281 multind @r{The multind.sty package} | |
4282 index @r{The index.sty package} | |
4283 index-shortcut @r{The index.sty packages with the ^ and _ shortcuts.} | |
4284 @r{Should not be used - only for old documents} | |
4285 @end example | |
4286 Note that AUCTeX sets these things internally for @b{Ref@TeX{}} as well, | |
4287 so with a sufficiently new version of AUCTeX, you should not set the | |
4288 package here. | |
4289 @end defopt | |
4290 | |
4291 @defopt reftex-index-default-macro | |
4292 The default index macro for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}. | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4293 This is a list with @code{(@var{macro-key} @var{default-tag})}. |
25829 | 4294 |
4295 @var{macro-key} is a character identifying an index macro - see | |
4296 @code{reftex-index-macros}. | |
4297 | |
4298 @var{default-tag} is the tag to be used if the macro requires a | |
4299 @var{tag} argument. When this is @code{nil} and a @var{tag} is needed, | |
4300 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask for it. When this is the empty string and the | |
4301 TAG argument of the index macro is optional, the TAG argument will be | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4302 omitted.@refill |
25829 | 4303 @end defopt |
4304 | |
4305 @defopt reftex-index-default-tag | |
4306 Default index tag. When working with multiple indexes, RefTeX queries | |
4307 for an index tag when creating index entries or displaying a specific | |
4308 index. This variable controls the default offered for these queries. | |
4309 The default can be selected with @key{RET} during selection or | |
4310 completion. Legal values of this variable are:@refill | |
4311 @example | |
4312 nil @r{Do not provide a default index} | |
4313 "tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g. "idx"} | |
4314 last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default} | |
4315 @end example | |
4316 @end defopt | |
4317 | |
4318 @defopt reftex-index-math-format | |
4319 Format of index entries when copied from inside math mode. When | |
4320 @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside TeX math mode, | |
4321 the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format | |
4322 string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the | |
4323 math delimiters (e.g. @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the | |
4324 @file{texmathp.el} library which is part of AUCTeX.@refill | |
4325 @end defopt | |
4326 | |
27195 | 4327 @defopt reftex-index-phrase-file-extension |
4328 File extension for the index phrase file. This extension will be added | |
4329 to the base name of the master file. | |
4330 @end defopt | |
4331 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4332 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4333 Regexp matching the @samp{and} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4334 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4335 this operator, each part will generate an index macro. So each match of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4336 the search phrase will produce @emph{several} different index entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4337 Make sure this does no match things which are not separators. This |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4338 logical @samp{and} has higher priority than the logical @samp{or} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4339 specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4340 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4341 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4342 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4343 Regexp matching the @samp{or} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4344 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4345 this operator, the user will be asked to select one of them at each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4346 match of the search phrase. The first index arg will be the default. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4347 number key @kbd{1}--@kbd{9} must be pressed to switch to another. Make |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4348 sure this does no match things which are not separators. The logical |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4349 @samp{and} specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4350 has higher priority than this logical @samp{or}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4351 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4352 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4353 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-search-whole-words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4354 Non-@code{nil} means phrases search will look for whole words, not subwords. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4355 This works by requiring word boundaries at the beginning and end of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4356 the search string. When the search phrase already has a non-word-char |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4357 at one of these points, no word boundary is required there. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4358 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4359 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4360 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-case-fold-search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4361 Non-@code{nil} means, searching for index phrases will ignore |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4362 case.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4363 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4364 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4365 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-skip-indexed-matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4366 Non-@code{nil} means, skip matches which appear to be indexed already. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4367 When doing global indexing from the phrases buffer, searches for some |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4368 phrases may match at places where that phrase was already indexed. In |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4369 particular when indexing an already processed document again, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4370 will even be the norm. When this variable is non-@code{nil}, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4371 @b{Ref@TeX{}} checks if the match is an index macro argument, or if an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4372 index macro is directly before or after the phrase. If that is the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4373 case, that match will be ignored.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4374 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4375 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4376 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-wrap-long-lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4377 Non-@code{nil} means, when indexing from the phrases buffer, wrap lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4378 Inserting indexing commands in a line makes the line longer - often |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4379 so long that it does not fit onto the screen. When this variable is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4380 non-@code{nil}, newlines will be added as necessary before and/or after the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4381 indexing command to keep lines short. However, the matched text |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4382 phrase and its index command will always end up on a single line.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4383 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4384 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4385 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4386 Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4387 is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4388 sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4389 an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4390 non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4391 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4392 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4393 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4394 Non-@code{nil} means, empty and comment lines separate phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4395 into blocks. Sorting will then preserve blocks, so that lines are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4396 re-arranged only within blocks. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4397 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4398 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4399 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-map |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4400 Keymap for the Index Phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4401 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4402 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4403 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-mode-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4404 Normal hook which is run when a buffer is put into |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4405 @code{reftex-index-phrases-mode}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4406 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4407 |
25829 | 4408 @defopt reftex-index-section-letters |
4409 The letters which denote sections in the index. Usually these are all | |
4410 capital letters. Don't use any downcase letters. Order is not | |
4411 significant, the index will be sorted by whatever the sort function | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4412 thinks is correct. In addition to these letters, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4413 create a group @samp{!} which contains all entries sorted below the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4414 lowest specified letter. In the @file{*Index*} buffer, pressing any of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4415 these capital letters or @kbd{!} will jump to that section.@refill |
25829 | 4416 @end defopt |
4417 | |
4418 @defopt reftex-index-include-context | |
4419 Non-@code{nil} means, display the index definition context in the | |
4420 @file{*Index*} buffer. This flag may also be toggled from the | |
4421 @file{*Index*} buffer with the @kbd{c} key. | |
4422 @end defopt | |
4423 | |
4424 @defopt reftex-index-follow-mode | |
4425 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*Index*} buffer will cause other | |
4426 window to follow. The other window will show the corresponding part of | |
4427 the document. This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*Index*} | |
4428 buffer with the @kbd{f} key. | |
4429 @end defopt | |
4430 | |
4431 @deffn Keymap reftex-index-map | |
4432 The keymap which is active in the @file{*Index*} buffer | |
4433 (@pxref{Index Support}).@refill | |
4434 @end deffn | |
4435 | |
4436 @node Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Finding Files), Options (Index Support), Options | |
4437 @section Viewing Cross-References | |
4438 @cindex Options, viewing cross-references | |
4439 @cindex Viewing cross-references, options | |
4440 | |
4441 @defopt reftex-view-crossref-extra | |
4442 Macros which can be used for the display of cross references. | |
4443 This is used when `reftex-view-crossref' is called with point in an | |
4444 argument of a macro. Note that crossref viewing for citations, | |
4445 references (both ways) and index entries is hard-coded. This variable | |
4446 is only to configure additional structures for which crossreference | |
4447 viewing can be useful. Each entry has the structure | |
4448 @example | |
4449 (@var{macro-re} @var{search-re} @var{highlight}). | |
4450 @end example | |
4451 @var{macro-re} is matched against the macro. @var{search-re} is the | |
4452 regexp used to search for cross references. @samp{%s} in this regexp is | |
4453 replaced with with the macro argument at point. @var{highlight} is an | |
4454 integer indicating which subgroup of the match should be highlighted. | |
4455 @end defopt | |
4456 | |
4457 @defopt reftex-auto-view-crossref | |
4458 Non-@code{nil} means, initially turn automatic viewing of crossref info | |
4459 on. Automatic viewing of crossref info normally uses the echo area. | |
4460 Whenever point is on the argument of a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} | |
4461 macro, and no other message is being displayed, the echo area will | |
4462 display information about that cross reference. You can also set the | |
4463 variable to the symbol @code{window}. In this case a small temporary | |
4464 window is used for the display. This feature can be turned on and of | |
4465 from the menu (Ref->Options).@refill | |
4466 @end defopt | |
4467 | |
4468 @defopt reftex-idle-time | |
4469 Time (secs) Emacs has to be idle before automatic crossref display is | |
4470 done.@refill | |
4471 @end defopt | |
4472 | |
4473 @defopt reftex-cite-view-format | |
4474 Citation format used to display citation info in the message area. See | |
4475 the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible percent | |
4476 escapes.@refill | |
4477 @end defopt | |
4478 | |
4479 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-echo | |
4480 Non-@code{nil} means, automatic citation display will revisit files if | |
4481 necessary. When nil, citation display in echo area will only be active | |
4482 for cached echo strings (see @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}), or for | |
4483 BibTeX database files which are already visited by a live associated | |
4484 buffers.@refill | |
4485 @end defopt | |
4486 | |
4487 @defopt reftex-cache-cite-echo | |
4488 Non-@code{nil} means, the information displayed in the echo area for | |
4489 cite macros (see variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}) is cached and | |
4490 saved along with the parsing information. The cache survives document | |
4491 scans. In order to clear it, use @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode}. | |
4492 @end defopt | |
4493 | |
4494 @node Options (Finding Files), Options (Optimizations), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options | |
4495 @section Finding Files | |
4496 @cindex Options, Finding Files | |
4497 @cindex Finding files, options | |
4498 | |
4499 @defopt reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
4500 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for TeX files. | |
4501 Several entries are possible.@refill | |
4502 @itemize @minus | |
4503 @item | |
4504 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
4505 used.@refill | |
4506 @item | |
4507 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4508 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4509 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.tex"}}. | |
4510 @item | |
4511 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4512 @end itemize | |
4513 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4514 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4515 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4516 @end defopt | |
4517 | |
4518 @defopt reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
4519 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for BibTeX | |
4520 files. Several entries are possible.@refill | |
4521 @itemize @minus | |
4522 @item | |
4523 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
4524 used.@refill | |
4525 @item | |
4526 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4527 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4528 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.bib"}}. | |
4529 @item | |
4530 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4531 @end itemize | |
4532 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4533 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4534 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4535 @end defopt | |
4536 | |
4537 @defopt reftex-file-extensions | |
4538 Association list with file extensions for different file types. | |
4539 This is a list of items, each item is like: | |
4540 @code{(@var{type} . (@var{def-ext} @var{other-ext} ...))} | |
4541 @example | |
4542 @var{type}: @r{File type like @code{"bib"} or @code{"tex"}.} | |
4543 @var{def-ext}: @r{The default extension for that file type, like @code{".tex"} or @code{".bib"}.} | |
4544 @var{other-ext}: @r{Any number of other legal extensions for this file type.} | |
4545 @end example | |
4546 When a files is searched and it does not have any of the legal extensions, | |
4547 we try the default extension first, and then the naked file name.@refill | |
4548 @end defopt | |
4549 | |
4550 @defopt reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first | |
4551 Non-@code{nil} means, search all specified directories before trying | |
4552 recursion. Thus, in a path @samp{.//:/tex/}, search first @samp{./}, | |
4553 then @samp{/tex/}, and then all subdirectories of @samp{./}. If this | |
4554 option is @code{nil}, the subdirectories of @samp{./} are searched | |
4555 before @samp{/tex/}. This is mainly for speed - most of the time the | |
4556 recursive path is for the system files and not for the user files. Set | |
4557 this to @code{nil} if the default makes @b{Ref@TeX{}} finding files with | |
4558 equal names in wrong sequence.@refill | |
4559 @end defopt | |
4560 | |
4561 @defopt reftex-use-external-file-finders | |
4562 Non-@code{nil} means, use external programs to find files. Normally, | |
4563 @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches the paths given in the environment variables | |
4564 @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS} to find TeX files and BibTeX | |
4565 database files. With this option turned on, it calls an external | |
4566 program specified in the option @code{reftex-external-file-finders} | |
4567 instead. As a side effect, the variables | |
4568 @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables} and | |
4569 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables} will be ignored. | |
4570 @end defopt | |
4571 | |
4572 @defopt reftex-external-file-finders | |
4573 Association list with external programs to call for finding files. Each | |
4574 entry is a cons cell @w{@code{(@var{type} . @var{program})}}. | |
4575 @var{type} is either @code{"tex"} or @code{"bib"}. @var{program} is a | |
4576 string containing the external program to use with any arguments. | |
4577 @code{%f} will be replaced by the name of the file to be found. Note | |
4578 that these commands will be executed directly, not via a shell. Only | |
4579 relevant when @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders} is | |
4580 non-@code{nil}.@refill | |
4581 @end defopt | |
4582 | |
4583 @page | |
4584 @node Options (Optimizations), Options (Fontification), Options (Finding Files), Options | |
4585 @section Optimizations | |
4586 @cindex Options, optimizations | |
4587 @cindex Optimizations, options | |
4588 | |
4589 @defopt reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
4590 Non-@code{nil} means, keep buffers created for parsing and lookup. | |
4591 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sometimes needs to visit files related to the current | |
4592 document. We distinguish files visited for@refill | |
4593 @table @asis | |
4594 @item PARSING | |
4595 Parts of a multifile document loaded when (re)-parsing the | |
4596 document.@refill | |
4597 @item LOOKUP | |
4598 BibTeX database files and TeX files loaded to find a reference, to | |
4599 display label context, etc.@refill | |
4600 @end table | |
4601 The created buffers can be kept for later use, or be thrown away | |
4602 immediately after use, depending on the value of this variable:@refill | |
4603 | |
4604 @table @code | |
4605 @item nil | |
4606 Throw away as much as possible. | |
4607 @item t | |
4608 Keep everything. | |
4609 @item 1 | |
4610 Throw away buffers created for parsing, but keep the ones created for | |
4611 lookup.@refill | |
4612 @end table | |
4613 | |
4614 If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is | |
4615 potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown | |
4616 away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | |
4617 @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}.@refill | |
4618 @end defopt | |
4619 | |
4620 @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
4621 Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file | |
4622 temporarily. When @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may turn off find-file hooks and | |
4623 other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default | |
4624 initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of | |
4625 @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook | |
4626 functions to do a minimal initialization.@refill | |
4627 @end defopt | |
4628 | |
4629 @defopt reftex-no-include-regexps | |
4630 List of regular expressions to exclude certain input files from parsing. | |
4631 If the name of a file included via @code{\include} or @code{\input} is | |
4632 matched by any of the regular expressions in this list, that file is not | |
4633 parsed by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
4634 @end defopt | |
4635 | |
4636 @defopt reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
4637 Non-@code{nil} means, re-parse only 1 file when asked to re-parse. | |
4638 Re-parsing is normally requested with a @kbd{C-u} prefix to many @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4639 commands, or with the @kbd{r} key in menus. When this option is | |
4640 @code{t} in a multifile document, we will only parse the current buffer, | |
4641 or the file associated with the label or section heading near point in a | |
4642 menu. Requesting re-parsing of an entire multifile document then | |
4643 requires a @kbd{C-u C-u} prefix or the capital @kbd{R} key in | |
4644 menus.@refill | |
4645 @end defopt | |
4646 | |
4647 @defopt reftex-save-parse-info | |
4648 Non-@code{nil} means, save information gathered with parsing in files. | |
4649 The file @file{MASTER.rel} in the same directory as @file{MASTER.tex} is | |
4650 used to save the information. When this variable is @code{t}, | |
4651 @itemize @minus | |
4652 @item | |
4653 accessing the parsing information for the first time in an editing | |
4654 session will read that file (if available) instead of parsing the | |
4655 document.@refill | |
4656 @item | |
4657 exiting Emacs or killing a buffer in reftex-mode will cause a new | |
4658 version of the file to be written.@refill | |
4659 @end itemize | |
4660 @end defopt | |
4661 | |
27195 | 4662 @defopt reftex-parse-file-extension |
4663 File extension for the file in which parser information is stored. | |
4664 This extension is added to the base name of the master file. | |
4665 @end defopt | |
4666 | |
25829 | 4667 @defopt reftex-allow-automatic-rescan |
4668 Non-@code{nil} means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may rescan the document when this seems | |
4669 necessary. Applies (currently) only in rare cases, when a new label | |
4670 cannot be placed with certainty into the internal label list. | |
4671 @end defopt | |
4672 | |
4673 @defopt reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
4674 Non-@code{nil} means use a separate selection buffer for each label | |
4675 type. These buffers are kept from one selection to the next and need | |
4676 not to be created for each use - so the menu generally comes up faster. | |
4677 The selection buffers will be erased (and therefore updated) | |
4678 automatically when new labels in its category are added. See the | |
4679 variable @code{reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers}.@refill | |
4680 @end defopt | |
4681 | |
4682 @defopt reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
4683 Non-@code{nil} means, selection buffers will be updated automatically. | |
4684 When a new label is defined with @code{reftex-label}, all selection | |
4685 buffers associated with that label category are emptied, in order to | |
4686 force an update upon next use. When @code{nil}, the buffers are left | |
4687 alone and have to be updated by hand, with the @kbd{g} key from the | |
4688 label selection process. The value of this variable will only have any | |
4689 effect when @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers} is | |
4690 non-@code{nil}.@refill | |
4691 @end defopt | |
4692 | |
4693 @node Options (Fontification), Options (Misc), Options (Optimizations), Options | |
4694 @section Fontification | |
4695 @cindex Options, fontification | |
4696 @cindex Fontification, options | |
4697 | |
4698 @defopt reftex-use-fonts | |
4699 Non-@code{nil} means, use fonts in label menu and on-the-fly help. | |
4700 Font-lock must be loaded as well to actually get fontified | |
4701 display. After changing this option, a rescan may be necessary to | |
4702 activate it.@refill | |
4703 @end defopt | |
4704 | |
4705 @defopt reftex-refontify-context | |
4706 Non-@code{nil} means, re-fontify the context in the label menu with | |
4707 font-lock. This slightly slows down the creation of the label menu. It | |
4708 is only necessary when you definitely want the context fontified.@refill | |
4709 | |
4710 This option may have 3 different values: | |
4711 @table @code | |
4712 @item nil | |
4713 Never refontify. | |
4714 @item t | |
4715 Always refontify. | |
4716 @item 1 | |
4717 Refontify when necessary, e.g. with old versions of the x-symbol | |
4718 package.@refill | |
4719 @end table | |
4720 The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}.@refill | |
4721 @end defopt | |
4722 | |
4723 @defopt reftex-highlight-selection | |
4724 Non-@code{nil} means, highlight selected text in selection and | |
4725 @file{*toc*} buffers. Normally, the text near the cursor is the | |
4726 @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most | |
4727 keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you | |
4728 mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have | |
4729 mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The | |
4730 variable may have one of these values:@refill | |
4731 | |
4732 @example | |
4733 nil @r{No highlighting.} | |
4734 cursor @r{Highlighting is cursor driven.} | |
4735 mouse @r{Highlighting is mouse driven.} | |
4736 both @r{Both cursor and mouse trigger highlighting.} | |
4737 @end example | |
4738 | |
4739 Changing this variable requires to rebuild the selection and *toc* | |
4740 buffers to become effective (keys @kbd{g} or @kbd{r}).@refill | |
4741 @end defopt | |
4742 | |
4743 @defopt reftex-cursor-selected-face | |
4744 Face name to highlight cursor selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
4745 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.@refill | |
4746 @end defopt | |
4747 @defopt reftex-mouse-selected-face | |
4748 Face name to highlight mouse selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
4749 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.@refill | |
4750 @end defopt | |
4751 @defopt reftex-file-boundary-face | |
4752 Face name for file boundaries in selection buffer. | |
4753 @end defopt | |
4754 @defopt reftex-label-face | |
4755 Face name for labels in selection buffer. | |
4756 @end defopt | |
4757 @defopt reftex-section-heading-face | |
4758 Face name for section headings in toc and selection buffers. | |
4759 @end defopt | |
4760 @defopt reftex-toc-header-face | |
4761 Face name for the header of a toc buffer. | |
4762 @end defopt | |
4763 @defopt reftex-bib-author-face | |
4764 Face name for author names in bib selection buffer. | |
4765 @end defopt | |
4766 @defopt reftex-bib-year-face | |
4767 Face name for year in bib selection buffer. | |
4768 @end defopt | |
4769 @defopt reftex-bib-title-face | |
4770 Face name for article title in bib selection buffer. | |
4771 @end defopt | |
4772 @defopt reftex-bib-extra-face | |
4773 Face name for bibliographic information in bib selection buffer. | |
4774 @end defopt | |
4775 @defopt reftex-select-mark-face | |
4776 Face name for marked entries in the selection buffers. | |
4777 @end defopt | |
4778 @defopt reftex-index-header-face | |
4779 Face name for the header of an index buffer. | |
4780 @end defopt | |
4781 @defopt reftex-index-section-face | |
4782 Face name for the start of a new letter section in the index. | |
4783 @end defopt | |
4784 @defopt reftex-index-tag-face | |
4785 Face name for index names (for multiple indices). | |
4786 @end defopt | |
4787 @defopt reftex-index-face | |
4788 Face name for index entries. | |
4789 @end defopt | |
4790 | |
4791 @node Options (Misc), , Options (Fontification), Options | |
4792 @section Miscellaneous | |
4793 @cindex Options, misc | |
4794 | |
4795 @defopt reftex-extra-bindings | |
4796 Non-@code{nil} means, make additional key bindings on startup. These | |
4797 extra bindings are located in the users @samp{C-c letter} | |
4798 map. @xref{Keybindings}.@refill | |
4799 @end defopt | |
4800 | |
4801 @defopt reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX | |
4802 Plug-in flags for AUCTeX interface. This variable is a list of | |
4803 5 boolean flags. When a flag is non-@code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4804 will@refill | |
4805 | |
4806 @example | |
4807 - supply labels in new sections and environments (flag 1) | |
4808 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\label} (flag 2) | |
4809 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\ref} (flag 3) | |
4810 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\cite} (flag 4) | |
4811 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\index} (flag 5) | |
4812 @end example | |
4813 | |
4814 You may also set the variable itself to t or nil in order to turn all | |
4815 options on or off, respectively.@* | |
4816 Supplying labels in new sections and environments applies when creating | |
4817 sections with @kbd{C-c C-s} and environments with @kbd{C-c C-e}.@* | |
4818 Supplying macro arguments applies when you insert such a macro | |
4819 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}.@* | |
4820 See the AUCTeX documentation for more information. | |
4821 @end defopt | |
4822 | |
4823 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
4824 Non-@code{nil} means, follow-mode will revisit files if necessary. | |
4825 When nil, follow-mode will be suspended for stuff in unvisited files. | |
4826 @end defopt | |
4827 | |
4828 @defopt reftex-allow-detached-macro-args | |
4829 Non-@code{nil} means, allow arguments of macros to be detached by | |
4830 whitespace. When this is @code{t}, the @samp{aaa} in @w{@samp{\bbb | |
4831 [xxx] @{aaa@}}} will be considered an argument of @code{\bb}. Note that | |
4832 this will be the case even if @code{\bb} is defined with zero or one | |
4833 argument.@refill | |
4834 @end defopt | |
4835 | |
4836 @node Keymaps and Hooks, Changes, Options, Top | |
4837 @section Keymaps and Hooks | |
4838 @cindex Keymaps | |
4839 | |
4840 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has the usual general keymap and load-- and mode-hook. | |
4841 | |
4842 @deffn Keymap reftex-mode-map | |
4843 The keymap for @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. | |
4844 @end deffn | |
4845 | |
4846 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-load-hook | |
4847 Normal hook which is being run when loading @file{reftex.el}. | |
4848 @end deffn | |
4849 | |
4850 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-mode-hook | |
4851 Normal hook which is being run when turning on @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode.@refill | |
4852 @end deffn | |
4853 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4854 Furthermore, the 4 modes used for referencing labels, creating |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4855 citations, the table of contents buffer and the phrases buffer have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4856 their own keymaps and mode hooks. See the respective sections. There |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4857 are many more hooks which are described in the relevant sections about |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4858 options for a specific part of @b{Ref@TeX{}}.@refill |
25829 | 4859 |
4860 @node Changes, , Keymaps and Hooks, Top | |
4861 @chapter Changes | |
4862 @cindex Changes | |
4863 | |
4864 Here is a list of recent changes to @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
4865 | |
4866 @ignore | |
4867 @noindent @b{Version 1.00} | |
4868 @itemize @bullet | |
4869 @item | |
4870 released on 7 Jan 1997. | |
4871 @end itemize | |
4872 | |
4873 @noindent @b{Version 1.04} | |
4874 @itemize @bullet | |
4875 @item | |
4876 Macros as wrappers, AMSTeX support, delayed context parsing for | |
4877 new labels.@refill | |
4878 @end itemize | |
4879 | |
4880 @noindent @b{Version 1.05} | |
4881 @itemize @bullet | |
4882 @item | |
4883 XEmacs port. | |
4884 @end itemize | |
4885 | |
4886 @noindent @b{Version 1.07} | |
4887 @itemize @bullet | |
4888 @item | |
4889 @b{Ref@TeX{}} gets its own menu. | |
4890 @end itemize | |
4891 | |
4892 @noindent @b{Version 1.09} | |
4893 @itemize @bullet | |
4894 @item | |
4895 Support for @code{tex-main-file}, an analogue for | |
4896 @code{TeX-master}.@refill | |
4897 @item | |
4898 MS-DOS support. | |
4899 @end itemize | |
4900 | |
4901 @noindent @b{Version 2.00} | |
4902 @itemize @bullet | |
4903 @item | |
4904 Labels can be derived from context (default for sections). | |
4905 @item | |
4906 Configuration of label insertion and label referencing revised. | |
4907 @item | |
4908 Crossref fields in BibTeX database entries. | |
4909 @item | |
4910 @code{reftex-toc} introduced (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
4911 @end itemize | |
4912 | |
4913 @noindent @b{Version 2.03} | |
4914 @itemize @bullet | |
4915 @item | |
4916 @code{figure*}, @code{table*}, @code{sidewaysfigure/table} added to | |
4917 default environments.@refill | |
4918 @item | |
4919 @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} introduced (thanks to Rory Molinari). | |
4920 @item | |
4921 New functions @code{reftex-arg-label}, @code{reftex-arg-ref}, | |
4922 @code{reftex-arg-cite}.@refill | |
4923 @item | |
4924 Emacs/XEmacs compatibility reworked. XEmacs 19.15 now is | |
4925 required.@refill | |
4926 @item | |
4927 @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} (to be called from AUCTeX style | |
4928 files).@refill | |
4929 @item | |
4930 Finding context with a hook function. | |
4931 @item | |
4932 Sorting BibTeX entries (new variable: | |
4933 @code{reftex-sort-bibtex-matches}). | |
4934 @end itemize | |
4935 | |
4936 @noindent @b{Version 2.05} | |
4937 @itemize @bullet | |
4938 @item | |
4939 Support for @file{custom.el}. | |
4940 @item | |
4941 New function @code{reftex-grep-document} (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
4942 @end itemize | |
4943 | |
4944 @noindent @b{Version 2.07} | |
4945 @itemize @bullet | |
4946 @item | |
4947 New functions @code{reftex-search-document}, | |
4948 @code{reftex-query-replace-document}. | |
4949 @end itemize | |
4950 | |
4951 @noindent @b{Version 2.11} | |
4952 @itemize @bullet | |
4953 @item | |
4954 Submitted for inclusion to Emacs and XEmacs. | |
4955 @end itemize | |
4956 | |
4957 @noindent @b{Version 2.14} | |
4958 @itemize @bullet | |
4959 @item | |
4960 Variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} simplifies cooperation with | |
4961 AUCTeX.@refill | |
4962 @end itemize | |
4963 | |
4964 @noindent @b{Version 2.17} | |
4965 @itemize @bullet | |
4966 @item | |
4967 Label prefix expands % escapes with current file name and other stuff. | |
4968 @item | |
4969 Citation format now with % escapes. This is not backward | |
4970 compatible!@refill | |
4971 @item | |
4972 TEXINPUTS variable recognized when looking for input files. | |
4973 @item | |
4974 Context can be the nth argument of a macro.@refill | |
4975 @item | |
4976 Searching in the select buffer is now possible (@kbd{C-s} and | |
4977 @kbd{C-r}).@refill | |
4978 @item | |
4979 Display and derive-label can use two different context methods. | |
4980 @item | |
4981 AMSmath @code{xalignat} and @code{xxalignat} added. | |
4982 @end itemize | |
4983 | |
4984 @noindent @b{Version 3.00} | |
4985 @itemize @bullet | |
4986 @item | |
4987 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work better for very large projects: | |
4988 @item | |
4989 The new parser works without creating a master buffer. | |
4990 @item | |
4991 Rescanning can be limited to a part of a multifile document. | |
4992 @item | |
4993 Information from the parser can be stored in a file. | |
4994 @item | |
4995 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can deal with macros having a naked label as an argument. | |
4996 @item | |
4997 Macros may have white space and newlines between arguments. | |
4998 @item | |
4999 Multiple identical section headings no longer confuse | |
5000 @code{reftex-toc}.@refill | |
5001 @item | |
5002 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work correctly in combination with buffer-altering | |
5003 packages like outline, folding, x-symbol, iso-cvt, isotex, etc.@refill | |
5004 @item | |
5005 All labeled environments discussed in @emph{The LaTeX Companion} by | |
5006 Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley 1994) are part of | |
5007 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s defaults.@refill | |
5008 @end itemize | |
5009 | |
5010 @noindent @b{Version 3.03} | |
5011 @itemize @bullet | |
5012 @item | |
5013 Support for the LaTeX package @code{xr}, for inter-document | |
5014 references.@refill | |
5015 @item | |
5016 A few (minor) Mule-related changes. | |
5017 @item | |
5018 Fixed bug which could cause @emph{huge} @file{.rel} files. | |
5019 @item | |
5020 Search for input and @file{.bib} files with recursive path definitions. | |
5021 @end itemize | |
5022 | |
5023 @noindent @b{Version 3.04} | |
5024 @itemize @bullet | |
5025 @item | |
5026 Fixed BUG in the @emph{xr} support. | |
5027 @end itemize | |
5028 | |
5029 @noindent @b{Version 3.05} | |
5030 @itemize @bullet | |
5031 @item | |
5032 Compatibility code now first checks for XEmacs feature. | |
5033 @end itemize | |
5034 | |
5035 @noindent @b{Version 3.07} | |
5036 @itemize @bullet | |
5037 @item | |
5038 @code{Ref} menu improved. | |
5039 @end itemize | |
5040 | |
5041 @noindent @b{Version 3.10} | |
5042 @itemize @bullet | |
5043 @item | |
5044 Fixed a bug which made reftex 3.07 fail on [X]Emacs version 19. | |
5045 @item | |
5046 Removed unimportant code which caused OS/2 Emacs to crash. | |
5047 @item | |
5048 All customization variables now accessible from menu. | |
5049 @end itemize | |
5050 | |
5051 @noindent @b{Version 3.11} | |
5052 @itemize @bullet | |
5053 @item | |
5054 Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.) footnotes. | |
5055 @item | |
5056 Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select. | |
5057 @end itemize | |
5058 | |
5059 @noindent @b{Version 3.12} | |
5060 @itemize @bullet | |
5061 @item | |
5062 There are 3 new keymaps for customization: @code{reftex-toc-map}, | |
5063 @code{reftex-select-label-map}, @code{reftex-select-bib-map}. | |
5064 @item | |
5065 Refontification uses more standard font-lock stuff. | |
5066 @item | |
5067 When no BibTeX database files are specified, citations can also use | |
5068 @code{\bibitem} entries from a @code{thebibliography} environment.@refill | |
5069 @end itemize | |
5070 | |
5071 @noindent @b{Version 3.14} | |
5072 @itemize @bullet | |
5073 @item | |
5074 Selection buffers can be kept between selections: this is faster. | |
5075 See new variable @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers}.@refill | |
5076 @item | |
5077 Prefix interpretation of reftex-view-crossref changed. | |
5078 @item | |
5079 Support for the @code{varioref} package (@kbd{v} key in selection | |
5080 buffer).@refill | |
5081 @end itemize | |
5082 | |
5083 @noindent @b{Version 3.16} | |
5084 @itemize @bullet | |
5085 @item | |
5086 New hooks @code{reftex-format-label-function}, | |
5087 @code{reftex-format-ref-function}, @code{reftex-format-cite-function}.@refill | |
5088 @item | |
5089 TeXInfo documentation completed. | |
5090 @item | |
5091 Some restrictions in Label inserting and referencing removed. | |
5092 @item | |
5093 New variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
5094 @end itemize | |
5095 | |
5096 @noindent @b{Version 3.17} | |
5097 @itemize @bullet | |
5098 @item | |
5099 Additional bindings in selection and @file{*toc*} buffers. @kbd{g} | |
5100 redefined. | |
5101 @item | |
5102 New command @code{reftex-save-all-document-buffers}. | |
5103 @item | |
5104 Magic word matching made more intelligent. | |
5105 @item | |
5106 Selection process can switch to completion (with @key{TAB}). | |
5107 @item | |
5108 @code{\appendix} is now recognized and influences section numbering. | |
5109 @item | |
5110 File commentary shortened considerably (use Info documentation). | |
5111 @item | |
5112 New option @code{reftex-no-include-regexps} to skip some include files. | |
5113 @item | |
5114 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. | |
5115 @end itemize | |
5116 | |
5117 @noindent @b{Version 3.18} | |
5118 @itemize @bullet | |
5119 @item | |
5120 The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input. | |
5121 This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g. you can now | |
5122 switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc.@refill | |
5123 @item | |
5124 New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. | |
5125 @item | |
5126 @kbd{mouse-2} can be used to select in selection and @file{*toc*} | |
5127 buffers.@refill | |
5128 @item | |
5129 Fixed some problems regarding the interaction with VIPER mode. | |
5130 @item | |
5131 Follow-mode is now only used after point motion. | |
5132 @item | |
5133 @b{Ref@TeX{}} now finally does not fontify temporary files anymore. | |
5134 @end itemize | |
5135 | |
5136 @noindent @b{Version 3.19} | |
5137 @itemize @bullet | |
5138 @item | |
5139 Fixed bug with AUCTeX @code{TeX-master}. | |
5140 @end itemize | |
5141 | |
5142 @noindent @b{Version 3.21} | |
5143 @itemize @bullet | |
5144 @item | |
5145 New options for all faces used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. They're in the | |
5146 customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}.@refill | |
5147 @end itemize | |
5148 | |
5149 @noindent @b{Version 3.22} | |
5150 @itemize @bullet | |
5151 @item | |
5152 Fixed bug with empty context strings. | |
5153 @item | |
5154 @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} is now bound by default at | |
5155 @kbd{S-mouse-2}.@refill | |
5156 @end itemize | |
5157 | |
5158 @noindent @b{Version 3.23} | |
5159 @itemize @bullet | |
5160 @item | |
5161 Parse files @file{MASTER.rel} made compatible between Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5162 @item | |
5163 @code{kill-emacs-hook} and @code{kill-buffer-hook} now write the parse | |
5164 file. | |
5165 @item | |
5166 The cursor inside a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro can now trigger | |
5167 automatic display of crossref information in the echo area. See | |
5168 variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
5169 @item | |
5170 AUCTeX interface updates: | |
5171 @itemize @minus | |
5172 @item | |
5173 AUCTeX 9.9c and later notifies @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections. | |
5174 @item | |
5175 @b{Ref@TeX{}} notifies AUCTeX about new labels. | |
5176 @item | |
5177 @code{TeX-arg-ref} no longer used (introduction was unnecessary). | |
5178 @item | |
5179 @code{reftex-arg-label} and @code{reftex-arg-cite} fixed up. | |
5180 @item | |
5181 Settings added to @b{Ref@TeX{}} via style files remain local. | |
5182 @end itemize | |
5183 @item | |
5184 Fixed bug with @code{reftex-citation} in non-latex buffers. | |
5185 @item | |
5186 Fixed bug with syntax table and context refontification. | |
5187 @item | |
5188 Safety-net for name change of @code{font-lock-reference-face}. | |
5189 @end itemize | |
5190 | |
5191 @noindent @b{Version 3.24} | |
5192 @itemize @bullet | |
5193 @item | |
5194 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-echo}. | |
5195 @item | |
5196 Interface with X-Symbol (>=2.6) is now complete and stable. | |
5197 @item | |
5198 Adapted to new outline, which uses overlays. | |
5199 @item | |
5200 File names in @code{\bibliography} may now have the @code{.bib} | |
5201 extension.@refill | |
5202 @item | |
5203 Fixed Bug with parsing "single file" from master file buffer. | |
5204 @end itemize | |
5205 | |
5206 @noindent @b{Version 3.25} | |
5207 @itemize @bullet | |
5208 @item | |
5209 Echoing of citation info caches the info for displayed entries. | |
5210 New option @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}.@refill | |
5211 @item | |
5212 @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode} now also removes the file with parsing | |
5213 info.@refill | |
5214 @item | |
5215 Default of @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow} changed to nil. | |
5216 @end itemize | |
5217 | |
5218 @noindent @b{Version 3.26} | |
5219 @itemize @bullet | |
5220 @item | |
5221 [X]Emacs 19 no longer supported. Use 3.22 for Emacs 19. | |
5222 @item | |
5223 New hooks @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
5224 @code{reftex-string-to-label-function}.@refill | |
5225 @item | |
5226 Made sure automatic crossref display will not visit/scan files. | |
5227 @end itemize | |
5228 | |
5229 @noindent @b{Version 3.27} | |
5230 @itemize @bullet | |
5231 @item | |
5232 Macros can define @emph{neutral} labels, just like @code{\label} | |
5233 itself.@refill | |
5234 @item | |
5235 New option @code{reftex-allow-detached-macro-args}, default @code{nil}! | |
5236 @end itemize | |
5237 | |
5238 @noindent @b{Version 3.28} | |
5239 @itemize @bullet | |
5240 @item | |
5241 Auto view crossref for XEmacs uses @code{post-command-hook} to restart the | |
5242 timer, since itimer restart is not reliable.@refill | |
5243 @item | |
5244 Option @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} renamed to @code{-regexps}. | |
5245 @item | |
5246 Expansion of recursive tex and bib path rewritten. | |
5247 @item | |
5248 Fixed problem where @b{Ref@TeX{}} did not scan unsaved buffers. | |
5249 @item | |
5250 Fixed bug with section numbering after *-red sections. | |
5251 @end itemize | |
5252 | |
5253 @noindent @b{Version 3.30} | |
5254 @itemize @bullet | |
5255 @item | |
5256 In @code{reftex-citation}, the regular expression used to scan BibTeX | |
5257 files can be specified using completion on known citation keys. | |
5258 @item | |
5259 New keys @kbd{a} and @kbd{A} in BibTeX selection process to cite @emph{all} | |
5260 entries. | |
5261 @item | |
5262 New command @code{reftex-renumber-simple-labels} to renumber simple | |
5263 labels like @samp{eq:13} sequentially through a document. | |
5264 @end itemize | |
5265 @noindent @b{Version 3.33} | |
5266 @itemize @bullet | |
5267 @item | |
5268 Multiple selection buffers are now hidden buffers (they start with a | |
5269 SPACE). | |
5270 @item | |
5271 Fixed bug with file search when TEXINPUTS environment variable is empty. | |
5272 @end itemize | |
5273 @noindent @b{Version 3.34} | |
5274 @itemize @bullet | |
5275 @item | |
5276 Additional flag in @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} do make only | |
5277 lowercase labels (default @code{t}). | |
5278 @item | |
5279 All @file{.rel} files have a final newline to avoid queries. | |
5280 @item | |
5281 Single byte representations of accented European letters (ISO-8859-1) | |
5282 are now legal in labels. | |
5283 @end itemize | |
5284 @noindent @b{Version 3.35} | |
5285 @itemize @bullet | |
5286 @item | |
5287 ISO 8859 Latin-1 chars are converted to ASCII to derive better labels. | |
5288 This takes back the related changes in 3.34 for safety reasons.@refill | |
5289 @end itemize | |
5290 @noindent @b{Version 3.36} | |
5291 @itemize @bullet | |
5292 @item | |
5293 New value @code{window} for option @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
5294 @end itemize | |
5295 @noindent @b{Version 3.38} | |
5296 @itemize @bullet | |
5297 @item | |
5298 @code{reftex-view-crossref} no longer moves to find a macro. Point has | |
5299 to be on the macro argument. | |
5300 @end itemize | |
5301 @noindent @b{Version 3.41} | |
5302 @itemize @bullet | |
5303 @item | |
5304 New options @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables}, | |
5305 @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}, | |
5306 @code{reftex-external-file-finders}, | |
5307 @code{reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first}. | |
5308 @item | |
5309 @emph{kpathsearch} support. See new options and | |
5310 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables}. | |
5311 @end itemize | |
5312 @noindent @b{Version 3.42} | |
5313 @itemize @bullet | |
5314 @item | |
5315 File search further refined. New option @code{reftex-file-extensions}. | |
5316 @item | |
5317 @file{*toc*} buffer can show the file boundaries of a multifile | |
5318 document, all labels and associated context. New keys @kbd{i}, @kbd{l}, | |
5319 and @kbd{c}. New options @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}, | |
5320 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}, | |
5321 @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. @refill | |
5322 @end itemize | |
5323 @noindent @b{Version 3.43} | |
5324 @itemize @bullet | |
5325 @item | |
5326 Viewing cross-references generalized. Now works on @code{\label}, | |
5327 @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index}, variations of | |
5328 these, and from BibTeX buffers.@refill | |
5329 @item | |
5330 New option @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}.@refill | |
5331 @item | |
5332 Support for the additional sectioning commands @code{\addchap} and | |
5333 @code{\addsec} which are defined in the LaTeX KOMA-Script classes.@refill | |
5334 @item | |
5335 Files in @code{reftex-default-bibliography} will be searched along | |
5336 @code{BIBINPUTS} path.@refill | |
5337 @item | |
5338 Reading a parse file now checks consistency. | |
5339 @end itemize | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5340 @end ignore |
25829 | 5341 @noindent @b{Version 4.00} |
5342 @itemize @bullet | |
5343 @item | |
5344 RefTeX has been split into several smaller files which are autoloaded on | |
5345 demand. | |
5346 @item | |
5347 Index support, along with many new options. | |
5348 @item | |
5349 The selection of keys for @code{\ref} and @code{\cite} now allows to | |
5350 select multiple items by marking entries with the @kbd{m} key. | |
5351 @item | |
5352 Fancyref support. | |
5353 @end itemize | |
5354 @noindent @b{Version 4.01} | |
5355 @itemize @bullet | |
5356 @item | |
5357 New command @code{reftex-index-globally} to index a word in many | |
5358 places in the document. Also available from the index buffer with | |
5359 @kbd{&}. | |
5360 @item | |
5361 The first item in a @code{reftex-label-alist} entry may now also be a parser | |
5362 function to do non-standard parsing. | |
5363 @item | |
5364 @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref} no longer interferes with | |
5365 @code{pop-up-frames} (patch from Stefan Monnier). | |
5366 @end itemize | |
5367 @noindent @b{Version 4.02} | |
5368 @itemize @bullet | |
5369 @item | |
5370 macros ending in @samp{refrange} are considered to contain references. | |
5371 @item | |
5372 Index entries made with @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} in TeX | |
5373 math mode automatically get enclosing @samp{$} to preserve math mode. See | |
5374 new option @code{reftex-index-math-format}. Requires AUCTeX. | |
5375 @end itemize | |
5376 @noindent @b{Version 4.04} | |
5377 @itemize @bullet | |
5378 @item | |
5379 New option @code{reftex-index-default-tag} implements a default for queries. | |
5380 @end itemize | |
5381 @noindent @b{Version 4.06} | |
5382 @itemize @bullet | |
5383 @item | |
5384 @code{reftex-section-levels} can contain a function to compute the level | |
5385 of a sectioning command. | |
5386 @item | |
5387 Multiple @code{thebibliography} environments recognized. | |
5388 @end itemize | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5389 @noindent @b{Version 4.09} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5390 @itemize @bullet |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5391 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5392 New option @code{reftex-toc-max-level} to limit the depth of the toc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5393 New keybinding @kbd{t} in the @file{*toc*} buffer to change this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5394 setting.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5395 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5396 RefTeX maintaines an @file{Index Phrases} file in which phrases can be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5397 collected. When the document is ready, RefTeX can search all |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5398 these phrases and assist indexing all matches.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5399 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5400 The variables @code{reftex-index-macros} and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5401 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} have changed their syntax slightly. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5402 The @var{repeat} parameter has move from the latter to the former. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5403 Also calls to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} from AUCTeX style files |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5404 need to be adapted.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5405 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5406 The variable @code{reftex-section-levels} no longer contains the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5407 default stuff which has been moved to a constant.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5408 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5409 Environments like theorems can be placed into the TOC by putting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5410 entries for @samp{"begin@{theorem@}"} in |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5411 @code{reftex-setion-levels}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5412 @end itemize |
27195 | 5413 @noindent @b{Version 4.10} |
5414 @itemize @bullet | |
5415 @item | |
5416 Renamed @file{reftex-vcr.el} to @file{reftex-dcr.el} because of conflict | |
5417 with @file{reftex-vars.el} on DOS machines. | |
5418 @item | |
5419 New options @code{reftex-parse-file-extension} and | |
5420 @code{reftex-index-phrase-file-extension}. | |
5421 @end itemize | |
27604 | 5422 @noindent @b{Version 4.11} |
5423 @itemize @bullet | |
5424 @item | |
5425 Fixed bug which would parse @samp{\Section} just like @samp{\section}. | |
5426 @end itemize | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5427 @noindent @b{Version 4.12} |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5428 @itemize @bullet |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5429 @item |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5430 Support for @file{bibentry} citation style. |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5431 @end itemize |
25829 | 5432 |
5433 @node Index, , , Top | |
5434 @unnumbered Index | |
5435 @printindex cp | |
5436 | |
5437 @summarycontents | |
5438 @contents | |
5439 @bye | |
5440 |